The Indonesian Way

The Indonesian Way

Module 3 – Daily Routine

George Quinn & Uli Kozok

3

License“The Indonesian Way” by George Quinn and Uli Kozok is licensed under a Creative Commons“Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International (CC BY-NC-SA 4.0)” license.

Under the license you are free to:● Share — copy and redistribute the material in any medium or format● Adapt — remix, transform, and build upon the material

Under the following terms:

➢ Attribution — You must give appropriate credit, provide a link to the license, and indicate if changes were made. You may do so in any reasonable manner, but not in any way that suggests the licensor endorses you or your use.

➢ NonCommercial — You may not use the material for commercial purposes.➢ ShareAlike — If you remix, transform, or build upon the material, you must distribute

your contributions under the same license as the original.

Please note that the license covers the text and the sound files, but excludes the illustrations.

Date of Last Revision: 5 June 2016

The development of “The Indonesian Way” was sponsored by grant P017A090375-10 from the US Department of Education, International Research and Studies Program.The development of the print version was made possible by a grant received from the University of Tasmania.

Indonesian Online

«The Indonesian Way» is a great resource for learning Indonesian. However, once in a while itmay be good to use some alternative materials. At «Indonesian Online» you will find additionallearning resources using authentic texts, film, and even comic strips. Most materials at «Indone-sian Online» were developed by Prof. U. Kozok, who is co-author of «The Indonesian Way».

«Indonesian Online» provides you with hundreds of hours of high-quality learning resources forthe Indonesian language.

http://indonesian-online.com

Module 3

Daily Routine

The main aim of Module 3 is to provide you with the vocabulary, sentence shells and culturalskills that will enable you to ask and answer questions about the things you usually do each day.The module will also get you started connecting sentences together into extended narratives.

The module provides the vocabulary you will need to talk about daily activities. There is specialemphasis on developing your command of verbs. You will learn how to use a number of commonverbs with ber- and me- prefixes. You will learn the names of the days of the week and how to tellthe time of day. You will also get more practice in expressing opinions and preferences, and youwill learn to give responses to the questions “why?” and “who?”

There are a number of role plays in the module, all of which help you to speak with increasingfluency about everyday activities. The culminating role play revolves around an important institu-tion in Indonesian society, the Idul Fitri celebrations at the conclusion of the Muslim fastingmonth. You will be able to talk confidently, and at length, about what people usually do in thecourse of the day during Idul Fitri.

Indonesian Online

«The Indonesian Way» is a great resource for learning Indonesian. However, once in a while itmay be good to use some alternative materials. At «Indonesian Online» you will find additionallearning resources using authentic texts, film, and even comic strips. Most materials at «Indone-sian Online» were developed by Prof. U. Kozok, who is co-author of «The Indonesian Way».

«Indonesian Online» provides you with hundreds of hours of high-quality learning resources forthe Indonesian language.

http://indonesian-online.com

Lesson 32

Telling the Time

Aims

• To learn how to tell the time.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have ap-peared in previous lessons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.Foto: Jam Gadang di Bukittinggi, Sumatra Barat. © Eko Prianto

berjalan-jalan to walk around pagi morningbertanya to ask pegawai employeedi antara between siang noonkeluar to get out sore afternoonmalam night

“O’clock”

There are two words commonly used in Indonesian to mark thetimes of the day. They are jam and pukul. They appear in front of thetime expression. For example:

Jam empatFour o’clockPukul sepuluhTen o’clock

Both pukul and jam are widely used throughout Indonesia. Of thetwo terms, pukul is slightly more formal than jam. In The IndonesianWay we shall mostly use jam, but you should practise (and expect to hear) pukul as well.

Jam is not exactly the same as the English “o’clock”. “O’clock” is only used in English to markthe hours and not the divisions of an hour. We say “two o’clock” but not “two thirty o’clock” or“half past two o’clock”. But in Indonesian jam is placed in front of all expressions of the time ofday.

To indicate “past” in the sense “minutes past the hour” most Indonesians use lewat (some alsouse lebih, but let’s stick to the more common lewat for the moment). Thus:

32

Lesson 32

Jam dua lewat limaFive past two

Jam sebelas lewat sepuluhTen past eleven

To indicate “to” in the sense “minutes to/before the hour” you count back from the hour usingkurang (literally “less” or “minus”). Thus:

Jam tiga kurang limaFive to three (literally “three o’clock minus five”)

Jam empat kurang dua puluhTwenty to four

The word for “quarter” is seperempat (derived from the number empat). So you can say:

Jam satu lewat seperempatA quarter past oneJam enam kurang seperempatA quarter to six

Notice the different order of the components in these expressions compared with the order ofthe components in English.

Now comes the hard part. In order to express the notion of “half past the hour” you have to re-orient your mind a little. There is no “half past” in Indonesian, but only “half before”. You place theword for “half” (setengah) in front of the number indicating the following hour. For example:

Half past oneJam setengah dua (literally “half two o’clock”)

Half past twelveJam setengah satu

Finally, expressions of time can be made somewhat more precise by adding the terms for “inthe morning”, “in the afternoon”, “in the late afternoon” and “at night”. Of course, you have to al-ways bear in mind that Indonesian doesn’t have exact equivalents for these English terms. As youlearned in Lesson 1 pagi, siang and sore cover different hours of the day compared to the corres-ponding English terms. Study these examples:

Jam dua belas siangTwelve noon

Jam setengah lima soreFour thirty in the afternoon

Jam satu lewat seperempat siangA quarter past one in the afternoon

Jam delapan kurang seperempat pagiA quarter to eight in the morning

Lesson 32

Jam sepuluh malamTen o’clock at night

Jam dua belas tengah malamTwelve o’clock midnight

Jam setengah delapan pagi.Half past seven in the morning

Cara Indonesia: Telling the Time the Indonesian Way

As you can see from the examples above, because of the different order ofcomponents in expressions of time, because of the “peculiar” way of saying “halfpast”, and because of the somewhat different way Indonesians divide up the day,telling the time in Indonesian can be a bit of a headache at first for English speak-ers. You certainly have to concentrate hard to master these expressions and makethem come automatically. It will probably be no comfort to know that there are atleast two other domains of difficulty that you will have to wrestle with (though notright now).

First, as you saw above, you can use the terms lewat and kurang as equivalents of “past” and“to/before” together with the number indicating the hour concerned. But in everyday usage lewatand kurang are also quite normally and automatically linked with the expression for “half past”.Thus the normal way of saying “twenty to four”, for example, is jam setengah empat lewat sepu-luh, literally “a half before four plus ten”. And “twenty-five past twelve” is quite normally ex-pressed as jam setengah satu kurang lima, literally “a half before one, minus five”.

Another complicating factor is the much greater use Indonesians make of the twenty-four hourclock. So instead of saying, for example, jam lima sore (“five o’clock in the afternoon”) it is quitecommon to read, and even hear people say, jam tujuh belas (“seventeen o’clock”)

By the way, the Indonesian way of saying “half past” is derived from continental European us-age, in particular that of the Dutch. In Dutch you say half acht – literally “half eight” – where inEnglish we would say “half past seven”. To add a final complicating twist, in Malaysia (which, un-like Indonesia, used to be ruled by the British) the Dutch-derived way of saying “half past” is un-known. In Malaysia they use an English-influenced way of telling the time. So “half past three” inMalaysia is pukul tiga setengah, not pukul setengah empat as it would be in Indonesia.

More on lewat and kurang

In this lesson you have learned using kurang and lewat as indicators of time in the meaning“less” and “past”

You already encountered kurang in Lessons 11 and 18 in the meanings “insufficient”, “notenough”, and “too little”: Ini kurang bagus (This is not good enough), Uang saya kurang (I don’thave enough money), Anak itu makan kurang (That child eats too little), Kurang dana (Insufficientfunds).

Besides indicating “past” in time, lewat also means “to pass by”: Nanti kita lewat pabrik roti(Later we will pass the bread factory), and also “by way of”, “through” and “via”: Saya ke Jakartalewat Bandung (I go to Jakarta via Bandung).

Lesson 32

Exercise 32-01

What are these times?Example: Jam tiga lewat seperempat.You write: 03.15 (Note that in Indonesia you separate the hours from the minutes by using a point,not a colon.)

1. Jam sebelas2. Jam tiga kurang dua puluh3. Jam setengah tujuh4. Jam sepuluh lewat dua puluh5. Jam depalan kurang lima

6. Jam setengah empat kurang lima7. Jam enam8. Jam setengah satu9. Jam tujuh kurang seperempat

10. Jam setengah sembilan

Exercise 32-02

Here are some of the regular morning flights out of Adisucipto Airport at Yogyakarta. In therighthand column, write out each departure time in words in Indonesian. Begin each answer withJam or Pukul. Check the initial example first.

Tujuan Penerbangan Berangkat Write out the time in words

Denpasar Lion Air 05.45 Jam enam kurang seperempat

1. Denpasar Garuda 06.00

2. Jakarta Merpati 06.05

3. Jakarta Batavia Air 06.15

4. Jakarta Mandala 06.45

5. Jakarta Wings Air 06.55

6. Denpasar Garuda 07.05

7. Surabaya Lion Air 07.30

8. Surabaya Wings Air 10.35

9. Balikpapan Mandala 11.10

10. Balikpapan Garuda 11.25

Lesson 32

Boleh Tertawa, Boleh Juga Tidak(Laugh if you want to, but you don’t have to)

Orang Skotlandia Mau Berjalan-Jalan

Alastair McAlastair berkunjung ke kota Glasgow. Sesudah check in di hotel, dia ber-tanya kepada pegawai hotel:

“Maaf, jam berapa orang dapat makan di hotel ini?”“Makan?” kata pegawai. “Anda boleh makan pagi dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas. Makan

siang dari jam sebelas sampai jam tiga siang. Minum teh di antara jam tiga siang dan jam enamsore. Makan malam dari jam enam sore sampai jam sebelas malam.”

“Aduh!” kata Alastair McAlastair. “Kalau begitu, saya tidak dapat melihat kota ini! Saya harustinggal di hotel! Jam berapa saya dapat keluar untuk berjalan-jalan!?”

Adapted from “Tentang Orang Skotlandia” in Matra no. 74, September 1992, page 95

Cara Indonesia: Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner

Indonesians typically eat three times a day. Breakfast isusually called sarapan, but sometimes also makan pagi. In-donesians typically dine twice a day which is called makan si-ang and makan malam. Lunch is unknown.

The most typical Indonesian breakfast is nasi goreng (friedrice) prepared from the left-over rice from the previous day.The fried rice is often served with a fried egg. Breakfast timeis usually between 6:00 and 9:00. Other very popular break-fast dishes are mi goreng (fried noodles) , lontong sayur, andpecal. Dinner dishes are both based on rice with side dishes that al-

most always contain sambal (a chilli pepper based dish), kerupuk (crackers), vegetable, and occa-sionally a small piece of fish or meat. If no fresh fish or meat is served, it is usually substituted bydried anchovies (ikan teri) or other salted fish (ikan asin).

Foto: Lontong sayur served with tauco, rendang, and kerupuk udang (Kozok 2012)

Latihan 1–Kosa Kata Lalu

Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

berjalan-jalan between, among

bertanya from late morning to mid afternoon

di antara late afternoon

keluar less, doesn’t really..., not quite

Lesson 32

kurang morning (until about 11:00)

malam night

pagi office worker, employee

pegawai to ask a question

siang to go for a walk or stroll

sore to go or come out

Latihan 2–Waktu 1


1. jam empat a. a quarter past one

2. pukul sepuluh b. a quarter to six

3. jam dua lewat lima c. five past two

4. jam sebelas lewat sepuluh d. five to three

5. jam tiga kurang lima e. four o’clock

6. jam empat kurang dua puluh f. half past one

7. jam satu lewat seperempat g. ten o’clock

8. jam enam kurang seperempat h. ten past eleven

9. jam setengah dua i. twenty five past twelve

10. jam setengah satu kurang lima j. twenty to four

Latihan 3–Waktu 2

1. jam 14.00 a. jam sebelas lewat lima belas malam

2. jam 23.15 b. jam sebelas kurang lima siang

3. jam 16.25 c. jam setengah delapan pagi

4. jam 07.30 d. jam empat pagi

5. jam 00.05 e. jam delapan kurang seperempat malam

6. jam 12.55 f. jam setengah lima kurang lima sore

7. jam 04.00 g. jam dua belas lewat lima malam

8. jam 19.45 h. jam satu kurang lima siang

9. jam 10.55 i. jam dua siang

Lesson 32

Latihan 4–Waktu 3

Jodohkan gambar jam waktunya.

Latihan 5―Rangkai Kata

Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti:

1. “Alastair McAlastair is going on a visit to Glasgow city.”Alastair McAlastair―kota―berkunjung―ke―Glasgow.

2. “What time will I get to leave to go for a stroll?”Jam―keluar―saya―dapat―untuk―berapa―berjalan-jalan?

3. “You can eat breakfast from 7 o’clock until 11 o’clock in the morning.”Anda―sampai―dari―boleh―jam tujuh―jam sebelas―sarapan―siang.

Lesson 32

Latihan 6―Isian

Lengkapilah teks berikut sesuai dengan rekaman.―Listen to Sound File 032-01 to fill in the blanks.

Alastair McAlastair __________ ke kota Glasgow. __________ check in di hotel, dia

__________ kepada pegawai hotel:

“Maaf, jam berapa orang dapat __________ di hotel ini?”

“Makan?” kata __________. “Anda boleh makan __________ dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas. Makan siang dari jam sebelas __________ jam tiga siang. Minum teh di

__________ jam tiga siang dan jam enam sore. Makan malam dari jam enam sore sampaijam sebelas malam.”

“Aduh!” kata Alastair McAlastair. “Kalau __________, saya tidak dapat __________ kota ini! Saya harus tinggal di hotel! Jam berapa saya dapat __________ untuk berjalan-

jalan!?”

Latihan 7―Teka-Teki Silang

Mendatar:4. office worker, employee6. how much, how many7. late afternoon8. city, town10. to drink13. past (when telling the time)14. to go or come out15. until (a certain time), as far as

(a certain place)Menurun:1. to see, to look at2. must, have to3. less, isn’t/aren’t really...5. late morning to mid afternoon6. to ask a question9. may10. to eat11. night

Lesson 33

Making a Date or Appointment

Aims

• To learn how to ask about the time of day.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent words used in this lesson that have appeared in previous les-sons. Make sure that you remember their meanings.

berkunjung ke... to visit (a place) mungkin maybebioskop cinema nggak no, notgimana how, what is...like? pasar swalayan supermarketharus must, have to pesawat terbang airplaneikut to join in sampai untiljuga also sekarang nowkembali to return sekeliling aroundkira-kira approximately teman companion, friendkuliah university lecture tempat placekurang to, before (time) mandi to take a bath

“What Time?”

When you ask “what time?” you expect an answer with numbers in it. The Indonesian ques-tion-word that demands or expects a reply in the form of numbers is berapa. “What time?” is jamberapa? (some people will say pukul berapa?). For example:

Jam berapa?What time? What’s the time?

Jam setengah dua belas.It’s half past eleven.

Jam berapa sekarang?What time is it now?

Jam dua.It’s two o’clock

Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop?What time are you going to the cinema?

Jam lima kurang seperempat.At a quarter to five.

Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai?What time does/did the plane arrive?

Kira-kira jam setengah empat lewat lima.About twenty-five to four. (15:35)

33

Lesson 33

You can practise generating questions from the following substitutional table. Use it to practisegenerating questions from it. You will need to insert your own choice of a word wherever there isa line and complete the question in your own word wherever there are dots.

ke...makan pagi/ siang/ malammandi

adik Anda berbelanjateman Anda belajar...

Jam berapa (biasanya) Anda minum ____ di... ?pacar Anda pulang dari...ibu Anda ikut kuliah...

naik ____ ke...tidurbertemu dengan...

If you are asking about a particular time in the near future you can insert akan or mau.

ke ...makan pagi/siang/malammandi

adik Anda berbelanjateman Anda akan belajar ...

Jam berapa Anda mau minum ___ di ... ?pacar Anda pulang dari...ibu Anda ikut kuliah...

naik ___ ke...tidurbertemu dengan...

Sampai

In Lesson 32 we have encountered the word sampai as a preposition indicating the time or dis-tance within which the action occurs. The meaning of sampai is ‘until’, ‘up to’, ‘as far as’.

Dia bekerja sampai jam 8.He works until 8 o’clock. Dia bekerja di Bandung dari bulan Agustus sampai bulan Oktober.He worked in Bandung from August until October. Kami berjalan kaki sampai desa Sukamakmur.We walked as far as the village of Sukamakmur.

Lesson 33

Dari Sabang sampai Merauke.From Sabang to Merauke.

Sabang is the westernmost point of Indonesia and Merauke is the easternmost point of In-donesia. “Dari Sabang sampai Merauke” is the title of one of Indonesia's national songs. The dis-tance is 5236 km which is about the same as the distance between Boston and Lisbon, Frankfurtand Kabul, Tokyo and Honolulu, or Melbourne and Jakarta.

Sampai is also a verb with the meaning “to arrive”:Mereka sampai jam 15.30.They arrive at 15:30.Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai?What time does the plane arrive?

And finally, the preposition sampai is also used in a number of frequent expressions:Sampai nanti!See you later!Sampai jumpa!Until we meet again! / See you later. Sampai bertemu!So long! / Until we meet again!

Exercise 33-01

Make a question using the phrase in italics. Each question should begin with the questionphrase jam berapa. Then write an answer to the question. The answer should contain the timethat appears after the word jawaban (answer). It should be prefaced with the word jam and writtenout in full in words. Here is an example:

Pertanyaan: pulang dari kampusYou write: Jam berapa Anda pulang dari kampus?

Jawaban: 5.00 soreYou write: Jam lima sore.

1. Pertanyaan: akan makan di...Jawaban: 1.30 siang

2. Pertanyaan: mandiJawaban. 7.15 malam

3. Pertanyaan: masuk kuliah...Jawaban: 11.00 siang

4. Pertanyaan: mau pergi ke rumah temanJawaban: kira-kira 7.30 malam

5. Pertanyaan: akan bertemu dengan...Jawaban: 11.20 siang

6. Pertanyaan: berbelanja di pasar swalayanJawaban: 2.45 siang

7. Pertanyaan: tidur biasanyaJawaban : 10.30 malam

8. Pertanyaan: kembali ke pusat kotaJawaban: 4.45 sore

9. Pertanyaan: belajar bahasa IndonesiaJawaban: 12 tengah malam

10. Pertanyaan: berjalan-jalan keliling kampusJawaban: 7.05 pagi

Lesson 33

Making a Date or Appointment

You have practised accepting or politely parrying an invitation. You can now elaborate on thisa little by mentioning a particular hour of the day. Let’s look at two slightly different ways you canask someone for a date or make an appointment with someone.(1)

makan dapat bertemu siang

Apakah saya bisa belajar dengan Anda nanti sore jam ..... ?boleh minum malam

bercakap-cakap

(2)berkunjung ke...bermain tenis

dapat berjalan-jalan siangApakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti sore jam ......... ?

bisa belajar malamboleh makan

berlari di lapangan

Each of these shells can be the beginning point for an extended conversation. Using the lan-guage resources you have already studied you can accept the request / invitation by echoing thekey word in the question (dapat, bisa, boleh, mau) then, for example, you can ask di mana?(where?). From this point the conversation can go in a variety of directions. You can also rejectthe request / invitation, beginning your response with maaf (sorry). Further down there are two ex-amples of how a conversation might develop. As always, first listen to the dialogues very carefully,cover up the Indonesian side with a card and, using the English translation as a prompt, try to re-produce the Indonesian from memory, moving the card down to check that you got the Indone-sian correct.

Listen carefully to the following examples in Sound File 033-01. You can have a look atthe translation whenever you find difficult words in the dialogue.

Dialogue 1

Eka

Apakah saya dapat bertemu dengan Anda nanti sore jam setengah enam?

Tentu saja. Di mana?

DianBagaimana kalau di Restoran Boga Ria?

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana res-toran itu?

Di samping gedung bioskop di Jalan Sunan Muria, tidak jauh dari terminal bus.

Baik. Restoran Boga Ria itu restoran apa?

Restoran Jawa. Makanannya enak sekali.

O begitu. Saya suka makan ikan. Apakah Anda juga suka makan ikan?

Lesson 33

Suka sekali. Tetapi saya lebih suka ayam.

Apakah saya bisa naik bus ke sana?

Bisa. Anda bisa juga berjalan kaki ke sana.

Translation of Dialogue 1

Eka

Can I meet you this afternoon at half past five?

Of course you can. Where?

DianWhat about at the Boga Ria Restaurant?

The Boga Ria? Where is it?

Beside the movie house in Sunan Muria Street, not far from the bus terminal.

Okay. What kind of restaurant is the Boga Ria?

It’s a Javanese restaurant. Its food is very nice.

Really? I like fish. Do you like fish too?

Very much. But I prefer chicken. Can I go there by bus?Yes, you can. You can also walk there.

You can also refuse a request for a date or decline to make an appointment, in whichcase you think of an excuse and the dialogue might run something like this:

Dialogue 2

Eka

Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh?

Wah, maaf. Nanti malam saya harusbelajar.

DianBagaimana kalau nanti sore jam setengah lima?

Nanti sore? Maaf, nanti sore saya ke rumah kakak saya.

O begitu. Di mana rumah kakak Anda?

Jauh dari sini.

Jam berapa Anda pergi ke sana? Apakah saya boleh ikut?

Maaf, tidak bisa. Saya ke sana dengan orang tua saya. Mobilnya kecil. Maaf, tidak cukup tempat di mobil itu.

Translation of Dialogue 2

Would you like to come shopping with me tonight at seven o’clock?

Oh, I’m sorry. Tonight I’ve got to study.

What about this afternoon at half past four?

This afternoon? Sorry, I’m going to my elder sister’s place.

Lesson 33

Eka Dian

Oh, I see. Where is your sister’s house?

A long way from here.

What time are you going there? CanI come along?

I’m sorry, that’s not possible. I’m going with my parents. Their car is small. I’m sorry, but there’s not enough space in the car.

Exercise 33-02

Taking either of the two dialogues you have just studied as your beginning point, rewrite the dialogue changing the times, places and activities, but retaining the general shell of the dialogue. For example, if you take the second dialogue as your shell, your dialogue might begin:

Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya nanti siang jam satu?

Wah, maaf. Tidak mungkin. Nanti siang ada kuliah.

Role Play: Making a Date / Appointment

Taking the two questions on the previous exercise as your beginning points and using themodel dialogues that follow (but varying them), conduct a role play with your teacher/tutor or witha classmate in which a possible date or appointment is discussed. Try as hard as you can to givethe conversation extra life and variation by incorporating into it any of the language resources youhave studied in previous lessons.

In real life, conversations tend to meander and to be repetitive. Take advantage of this as youtalk about making a date or appointment. Using the resources of Module 1, ask where someonecomes from, ask about transport arrangements, ask for precise information about the location ofa place, talk about food and drink etc. Using the resources of Module 2 ask about someone’sfamily, talk about someone’s house, wander off on a tangent and ask about the price of some-thing. In short, flesh out your conversation with every resource of vocabulary, idiom and situationthat you have studied so far, while always keeping in mind that ultimately the conversation isabout making a date or appointment.

A “Street-Language” Variant of the Model Dialogue

You can also make an appointment or date using the lively, pithy language of in-formal interaction. Here is an example that parallels the formal, standard dialogue youhave been studying. What you read below is Javanese-style colloquial Indonesian.You might hear something like it in the streets of Semarang or Yogyakarta in CentralJava, but probably not in the streets of Kupang (Timor) or Medan (Sumatra). Remem-

ber too, that the speakers are young – older people would not normally talk like this.Listen to the dialogue first from Sound File 033-03, savouring the differences between it

and the more formal version you studied earlier in the lesson.

Lesson 33

Tati

Ketemu nanti sore yuk, setengah enam! Oke. Di mana?

NuningKalo di Restoran Boga Ria, gimana? Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana sih?Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria, nggak jauh dari terminal bis.

Beres. Restoran apaan sih Boga Ria?

Jawa punya. Makanannya lumayan. O gitu. Aku doyan ikan. Kamu juga doyan?

Doyan banget. Tapi aku lebih suka ayam. Bisa ke sana pake bis? Bisa. Jalan aja ya bisa.

Now read it through again taking in the notes in the righthand column below. From the notesyou will see that colloquial Indonesian can be more colourful, subtle and emotional than thesomewhat drier formal variant of the language. But equally you will see how very difficult and elu-sive a really authentic command of colloquial usage can be. It demands, among other things, aconfident familiarity with local cultures. And because this kind of language is not much writtendown, textbooks can only give you the bare basics. Mastery of it demands, above all, a reallysharp ear for the way people speak in everyday life in the streets, markets, campuses and street-side eateries of Indonesia.

Ketemu nanti sore yuk, setengah enam!

ketemu: (a borrowing from Javanese) ketemu is a common collo-quial variant of bertemu. yuk: a colloquial variant of ayo. setengah enam: the marker word for times of the day, jam or pukul, is often dropped in colloquial usage.

Oke. Di mana? oke: from English ‘okay’.

Kalo di Restoran Boga Ria, gimana?

kalo: an informal variant of kalau. gimana: an informal variant of bagaimana. Gimana may appear in the beginning or at the end of a phrase.

Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana sih? di mana: colloquial Indonesian tends to be pithy, dropping words (here restoran itu) where it is clear from preceding parts of the conversation what you are referring to. sih: one of many particles that are common in informal or slangy usage. Sih adds emphasis and colour to a question, often making the question feel more pointed, even adding a note of irritation, bewilderment, puzzlement, surprise or sarcasm.

Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria, nggak jauh dari terminal bis.

Samping gedung bioskop, di Sunan Muria: here the prepositiondi and the marker-word for street addresses jalan are dropped.nggak: a colloquial substitute for tidak.bis: a colloquial substitute for bus.

Beres. Restoran apaan sih Boga Ria?

beres: literally “fixed up”, “put right”, “all okay”, “resolved”. Here beres is close to the Australian colloquialism “No worries!” apaan: Apaan is a slangy variant of apa meaning “what kind”. Apaan adds a note of humorous scepticism or cynicism to the question, especially in combination with the salty particle sih, as ifyou are being jokingly sarcastic about a restaurant with a preten-tious name like Boga Ria (“Joyous Cuisine”).

Jawa punya. Makanannya lumayan.

punya: In colloquial Indonesian punya can be used with nouns, names and pronouns to express possession. As you have seen, instandard Indonesian the possessor follows the thing possessed (rumah Anda “your house”). But in the punya expressions of collo-quial Indonesian the possessor comes before the thing pos-sessed, the sequence being: noun/name/pronoun + punya + the name of the thing possessed. For example Itu saya punya sepeda “That’s my bicycle.” So the phrase Jawa punya means

Lesson 33

“Javanese” (i.e. “belonging” to Java) and is probably a pithy con-traction of Jawa punya restoran “a Javanese restaurant.” By the way, this kind of punya structure was probably borrowed into In-donesian from the Malay used by Chinese migrants in the streets of old Batavia. It parallels the possessive structure found in Chinese. lumayan: “not bad”. As in colloquial English, in colloquial Indone-sian there is a tendency to understate something when in fact youare really enthusiastic about it.

O gitu. Aku doyan ikan. Kamu juga doyan?

O gitu: a colloquial contraction of O begitu (I see. Really.)ya: “also”, “too” (a colloquial substitute for juga) Ya in this sense almost always comes after the subject of a sentence, never at the end of a phrase or sentence. doyan: a borrowing from Javanese) “to like something (especially certain foods)”, “to have a taste for”

Doyan banget. Tapi aku lebih sukaayam.

banget: from Jakarta-Malay “very”, “very much” tapi: a colloquial contraction of tetapi. aku: an informal and intimate substitute for saya.

Bisa ke sana pake bis? bisa: a mildly informal equivalent of dapat. pake: is an informal variant of pakai (to use, to wear) as a slangy counterpart of naik meaning “by (a certain mode of transport).”

Bisa. Jalan aja ya bisa. jalan: a colloquial contraction of berjalan kaki (to walk, to go on foot).aja: a colloquial contraction of saja (just, simply).Jalan aja ya bisa: Literally “Walk just also can.” (You can also simply walk). The pronoun kamu (you) has been dropped and the order of words is quite different from the formal usage you stud-ied in the model dialogue earlier in this lesson.

Now practise this exchange with a (preferably youthful) partner, imagining the relaxed, spon-taneous circumstances in which the two of you might be meeting and talking.

Latihan 1—Menjodohkan

Jodohkanlah kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

berkunjung approximately nggak airplanebioskop to take a bath pasar swalayan aroundgimana must, have to pesawat friendharus cinema sampai no, not (coll.)ikut possibly, maybe sekarang supermarketkembali to join in, follow sekeliling placekira-kira to return teman nowmandi how? (coll.) tempat to sleepmungkin to visit tidur until, to arrive

Lesson 33


Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan

1. Jam berapa? a. It’s two o’clock. 2. Jam setengah dua belas. b. What time is it now?3. Jam berapa sekarang? c. At what time?4. Jam dua. d. It’s half past eleven.5. Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop? e. About three thirty-five.6. Saya ke bioskop jam lima kurang

seperempat.f. What time does the plane arrive?

7. Jam berapa pesawat terbang sampai?

g. What time are you going to the cinema?

8. Kira-kira jam setengah empat le-wat lima.

h. I’m going to the cinema at a quarter to five.

Latihan 3—Menyimak: Pemahaman

Listen to Sound File 033-01 to answer the following questions:

1. Eka and Dian are...A. close friendsB. dating each otherC. marriedD. know each other only vaguely

2. Is the following statement true or false?: “Eka wants to meet Dian at 18:30”A. TrueB. False

3. Is the following statement true or false?: “Dian agrees with the proposed time.”A. TrueB. False

4. Dian knows the address of the restaurant. The restaurant is located:A. opposite a cinemaB. in close proximity to a bus terminalC. on Jalan Sunan MuriaD. quite far from the bus terminalE. in the same building where the cinema isF. in the Sunan Muria building

5. When someone asks “rumah makan Andalas itu restoran apa?” then the possible match-ing answer is:A. Rumah makan PadangB. enak sekali makanannyaC. rumah makan itu mahal sekaliD. cukup besar

Lesson 33

6. What does Dian like to eat?A. chickenB. beefC. porkD. fishE. she is vegetarian

7. What phrase does Eka use to say that he prefers chicken?

8. Instead of naik bus one can also say berjalan bus.A. TrueB. False

9. Instead of berjalan kaki one can also say naik kaki.A. TrueB. False

Latihan 4—Invitation Accepted

Dengarkan Rekaman 033-01 dan lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yangtepat.

Eka Apakah saya dapat ___________ ___________ Anda nanti sore jam setengah enam?

Dian Tentu saja. Di mana?

Eka Bagaimana kalau di Restoran Boga Ria?

Dian Restoran Boga Ria? Di mana restoran itu?

Eka Di samping ___________ bioskop di Jalan Sunan Muria, tidak jauh dari terminal bus.

Dian Baik. Restoran Boga Ria itu restoran apa?

Eka Restoran Jawa. Makanannya enak ___________.

Dian O begitu. Saya ___________ makan ikan. Apakah Anda juga suka makan ___________?

Eka Suka sekali. Tetapi saya lebih suka ayam.

Dian Apakah saya ___________ naik bus ke sana?

Eka Bisa. Anda bisa juga ___________ kaki ke sana.

Lesson 33

Latihan 5—Invitation Refused

Latihan 6—Informal Style

Lesson 33

Latihan 7—Rangkai Kata

Urutkan kata-kata berikut ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti:

1. “What time are you going to the cinema?”Jam—ke—berapa—Anda—bioskop?

2. “I’m going to the cinema at a quarter to five.”Saya—jam—kurang—ke—lima—bioskop—seperempat.

3. “What time does/did the plane arrive?”Jam—terbang—berapa—pesawat—sampai?

4. “About three thirty-five.”Kira-kira—jam—lewat—empat—setengah—lima.

Latihan 8—Jodohkan: Informal Indonesian

1. This term is a common colloquial variant of bertemu. a. apaan

2. A colloquial variant of ayo b. gimana

3. The informal speech used to say “all okay” or “no worries”. c. sih

4. An informal variant of bagaimana. d. ketemu

5. A slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a question. e. nggak

6. A colloquial substitute for tidak. f. lumayan

7. A slangy variant of apa meaning ’what kind’. g. punya

8. Can be used with nouns, names and pronouns to express possession. h. yuk

9. Used to express: “fair”, “reasonable”, “quite okay”, or “not bad” i. beres

Lesson 33

Latihan 9—Teka-Teki SilangMendatar:1. companion, friend3. to eat, to have a meal6. to go shopping7. you’re welcome 9. = bagaimana (informal)11. must, have to13. cinema16. to drink17. field, ground, open space18. to sleep, to go to bed19. to play20. around, all aroundMenurun:2. an informal variant of tidak4. to study at a university5. to run6. to meet8. possibly, maybe10. place, location12. until, as far as, up to14. now15. to go or come along, to join in16. to take a bath

Lesson 34

“Who Do You Go Shopping With?”

Aims

• To practice talking about what you doat certain times of the day, and withwhom.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent words usedin this lesson that have appeared in previouslessons. Make sure that you remember theirmeanings.

ayah father bertemu to meet

belajar to study dengan with

berbelanja to go shopping lapangan field

angkot mini bus pulang to go home

bercakap-cakap to chat berangkat to depart

In the morning / afternoon etc.

You first met the word pada back in Lesson 20. It is a preposition with several different functions and meanings. It is often used in front of expressions for units of time like “day”, “year” etc. In these cases is translatable with the English words “on”, “at” and “in” depending on context. You have also already met the terms pagi, siang, sore and malam. You can squeeze more work out of these words by “book-ending” them with pada and hari (day). Study these phrases.

pada pagi hariin the morning

pada siang hariin the late morning to mid afternoon

pada sore hariin the late afternoon

pada malam hariat night

pada jam 16.00at four o'clock

pada bulan Oktoberin October

34

Berbelanja di Pasar Ikan (Pantai Depok) © Yan Arief

Lesson 34

These phrases with ...hari usually appear at the beginning or at the end of a sentence. Usingthem you can make sentences like these.

Biasanya saya pergi ke kampus pada pagi hari.I usually go to the campus in the morning.Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya belajar di perpustakaan.At night I sometimes study in the library.Pada sore hari saya suka minum kopi di ruang keluarga.In the late afternoon I like to drink coffee in the sitting room.

These phrases do not relate to a specific day, but they describe what you usually do (or whereyou are etc) at a certain part of the day. They hence differ considerably from nanti siang, nantisore, and nanti malam that you learned in Lesson 33 which all relate to single events occurring atthe present day:

Nanti siang saya masuk kantor.At around noon (roughly between 10 and 14:00) I will go to my office.Nanti malam saya berangkat ke Jakarta.Tonight I am leaving for Jakarta.

Dengan (with, together with) can help you describe who you do things with. Study this substi-tution table. Use the vocabulary you already know to add more items to the columns in the latterpart of the sentence. For example, in the verb column you could mention activities like makan,duduk, minum etc., and instead of the last two columns you could substitute the names of realpeople you know.

berjalan-jalan anak saya.pagi hari bercakap-cakap ayah saya.siang hari (kadang-kadang) bertemu ibu saya.

Pada sore hari (biasanya) saya belajar dengan pacar saya.malam hari berbelanja teman saya.

bermain tenis suami saya.bermain musik adik saya.

“With whom?”

The sentences in the table above can be used to answer questions with dengan siapa (withwhom?) in them. Usually dengan siapa comes at the end of a sentence. Practice generating ques-tions from the following substitution table, then answer them with complete sentences like thosein the table above. In the last columns you can insert the names of real people you know, as wellas the kinship terms you see above.

Lesson 34

berjalan-jalanpagi hari bercakap-cakapsiang hari bertemu

Pada sore hari (biasanya) Anda belajar dengan siapa ?malam hari berbelanja

bermain tenis bermain musik

Dialogue

Listen to the Sound File 034-01 two or three times, if necessary look at the transcription.

Ani

Pada sore hari Anda belajar dengan siapa?

Pada sore hari, saya belajar denganadik saya.

Eko

O begitu. Biasanya Anda belajar di mana?

Biasanya saya belajar di perpustakaan.

Jam berapa Anda pergi ke perpustakaan?

Saya pergi ke perpustakaan jam setengah enam.

Biasanya Anda pulang jam berapa? Biasanya saya pulang jam tujuh seperempat.*

Anda pulang naik apa? Saya pulang naik angkot.Hmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik angkot?

Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik angkot.

*) Occasionally lewat is omitted in colloquial speech.

Now go to Latihan 3 to test your understanding of the dialogue.

Exercise 34-01

In this exercise, you will listen to Sound File 034-02. Basically, it is the same sound file,but this time it is in the form of a substitution drill.

You will answer the questions using the cue words provided. Your answers should be acomplete long sentence. Say your answer out loud in confident, well pronounced Indone-sian. If necessary, stop the sound file and repeat the sentences as many times as necessary untilyou can produce all the sentences correctly first time, pronounce them smoothly, and understandinstantly what each one means.

Preferably you should do this exercise listening to the sound file, but you can also do it thisway: The changed word or phrase is given in the list on the right. Place a card over the sentencesand cue words. Move the card down and expose the first sentence. Say the sentence out loud,confidently and smoothly. Now look at the cue word on the right. Don’t move the card down yet.In your mind, insert the cue word into the sentence you have just read, substituting it for one ofthe words in the sentence so that you produce a new, slightly changed, but still correct sentence.Move the card down exposing the next line, and check that you got your new sentence right. Nowmake another new sentence using the new cue word that has come into view on the right. Pro-

Lesson 34

ceed in this way until you have completed the whole sequence of sentences. Repeat the se-quence as many times as necessary until you can produce all the sentences correctly first time,pronouncing them smoothly, and understanding instantly what each one means.

Pada sore hari Anda belajar dengan siapa? adik sayaO begitu. Biasanya Anda belajar di mana? perpustakaanJam berapa Anda pergi ke perpustakaan? setengah enamBiasanya Anda pulang jam berapa? tujuh seperempatAnda pulang naik apa? angkotHmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik angkot? Tidak. Saya tidak suka..

Now take the block of questions and answers you have just practised and introduce variationsinto it by putting new items into the blanks in the sentences. You should use different verbs, kin-ship terms (or names of people), places, times, modes of transport, and (in the case of the lastsentence) opinions. Make sure each sentence in the dialogue builds logically and sensibly on theprevious one.

Pada ...... hari Anda ...... dengan siapa?Pada ...... hari saya ...... dengan ......

O begitu. Biasanya Anda ...... di mana?Biasanya saya ...... di .......Jam berapa Anda pergi ke ......?Saya pergi ke ...... jam .......

Biasanya Anda pulang jam berapa?Biasanya saya pulang jam .......Anda pulang naik apa?Saya pulang naik .......

Hmmm. Apakah Anda suka pulang naik ......?Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik .......

NOW, repeat the dialogue over and over, each time inserting new items into the blanks. Whenyou think you have the vocabulary, sentence patterns and sentence sequences well mastered, putaside the textbook and talk direct to your teacher/tutor or a classmate, beginning your conversa-tion with Pada ...... hari, Anda ...... dengan siapa? Use the sentences you have practised as aspringboard to develop an extended conversation. Don’t be afraid to go back to the initial ques-tion and re-cycle it (using new words to talk about something a bit different, of course). At first,the conversation will sound rather stilted and formulaic, but as you gain confidence you will beable to personalise it more and more, and introduce more and more variations and extensions. Asyou do this remember to concentrate on maintaining grammatical correctness. And you shouldstick with the vocabulary you know, because if you try to say something and find that you don’thave enough words to say it, the conversation will “die”. So go back over your vocabulary cardsand refresh your recollection of the hundreds of relevant words we have practised up to this point.

As you practise, use a watch or clock to time yourself. You and your partner should be able totalk without a break for many minutes. See if you can “break your record” for non-stop, flowing,grammatically correct, talk each time you repeat the conversation.

Lesson 34

Exercise 34-02

Decide whether the following statements are true (benar) or false (salah).

1. Laki-laki itu biasanya pulang pada jam 19.15. Benar /Salah

2. Laki-laki itu suka belajar dengan adiknya di rumahnya. Benar /Salah

3. Laki-laki itu suka pulang naik angkot. Benar /Salah

4. Laki-laki itu pergi ke perpustakaan pagi-pagi sekali (very early in the morn-ing).

Benar /Salah

Then answer with a full sentence. You don’t have to write the answer, just say it aloud.

1. Benar. Laki-laki itu biasanya pulang jam tujuh lewat seperempat.NOTE: In Lesson 20 you learned the word betul in the meaning of ‘correct’, ‘that’s right’. Benar and betul are synonyms, and both share salah as their antonym.BENAR/BETUL: real; really, right; correct; valid; honest; true, truelySALAH: false; fallacious; incorrect; inaccurate; errant; erroneous; mistaken; wrong

Ucapan: Pronouncing the /h/ sound

Listen to Sound File 034-04. When /h/ appears at the end of a syllable inIndonesian it is very lightly, but audibly, breathed. Practise saying thesewords, audibly breathing the final /h/ sound.

rumah teh lebih murah

putih sekolah setengah kuliah

Lesson 34

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu


angkot to study bertemu field, open spaceayah city transport dengan librarybelajar to go shopping lapangan withberbelanja to chat pulang to go homebercakap-cakap father perpustakaan to meet

Latihan 2—Isian

Lengkapilah teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: belajar—berangkat—berbelanja—berjalan-jalan—berkunjung—bermain—bermain tenis—bertemu—malam hari—pada—pada sore hari—salah

1. __________ malam hari Agung __________ di Gedung Olahraga.

2. Rudi suka sekali musik Hawaiʻi. Sekarang dia sudah bisa __________ ukulele.

3. Besok pagi saya akan __________ dengan teman saya di perpustakaan.

4. Saya mau __________ di perpustakaan sampai __________.

5. Tahun depan Tono mau __________ di Sumatra.

6. Tono mau __________ ke Danau Toba dan dia juga mau naik Gunung Sibayak.

7. Bus dari Jakarta ke Medan biasanya __________ pada siang hari, tetapi kadang-kadangbusnya berangkat __________.

8. Saya mau ke Bandung, tetapi saya naik bus yang __________. Sekarang saya di Bogor!

9. Bagaimana kalau kita (we) __________ di Sarinah Mall? Saya mau mencari baju (shirt) un-tuk anak saya.

Latihan 3—Dialogue

Read the “Dialogue” between Eko and Ani above, and test your comprehension of the dialogue.

1. Eko pergi ke perpustakaan dengan adiknya.A. BenarB. Salah

2. Eko belajar di perpustakaan pada pagi hari.A. BenarB. Salah

Lesson 34

3. Eko pergi ke perpustakaan sesudah jam lima.A. BenarB. Salah

4. Eko belajar di perpustakaan lebih dari satu jam.A. BenarB. Salah

5. Eko pulang ke rumahnya naik taksi.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Eko suka sekali naik angkot.A. BenarB. Salah

Latihan 4—Menyimak

Listen to Sound File 034-03 and match the six recorded questions with anappropriate answer.

1. a. Biasanya saya pulang jam tujuh seperempat.2. b. Saya pergi ke perpustakaan jam setengah enam3. c. Saya pulang naik bemo.4. d. Tidak. Saya tidak suka pulang naik bemo.5. e. Biasanya saya belajar di perpustakaan6. f. Pada sore hari saya belajar dengan adik saya.


Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang benar, yang artinya :

1. “I usually go to the campus in the morning.”Biasanya—kampus—pada—pergi—ke—saya—pagi—hari.

2. “At night I sometimes study in the library.”Pada—hari—di—saya—belajar—malam—kadang-kadang—perpustakaan.

3. “In the late afternoon I like to sit and drink coffee in the sitting room.”Pada—di—dan—sore—duduk—ruang tamu—hari—saya—suka—minum kopi.

4. “In the late afternoon I will study with my friend.”Pada—dengan—teman—sore—hari—akan—saya—belajar—saya.

5. “My younger sibling does not like to play tennis.”Adik—tidak—bermain—saya—suka—tenis.

Lesson 34

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda

Some of these sentences are correct and make good sense, others are grammatically wrongor don’t make good sense. Decide whether they are Benar (True) or Salah (False).

1. Pada pagi hari biasanya saya beli roti di toko Holland Bakery.A. BenarB. Salah

2. Apakah biasanya teman Anda pulang naik sepeda motor?A. BenarB. Salah

3. Anda mau pergi ke bioskop jam apa?A. BenarB. Salah

4. Apakah mereka pulang naik apa?A. BenarB. Salah

5. Pacar saya tidak suka bermain tenis.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Pada sore siang saya akan belajar dengan kakak saya.A. BenarB. Salah

7. Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya pulang dari bioskop naik teman.A. BenarB. Salah

8. Biasanya Anda bercakap-cakap ke siapa?A. BenarB. Salah

9. Biasanya saya berolahraga pada pagi hari.A. BenarB. Salah

Lesson 34

Latihan 7—Teka Teki Silang

Mendatar:3. mini bus (public

transport)5. to meet7. to study8. to come or go home10. morning11. father13. space, room14. field, ground, open

space15. a halfMenurun:1. library2. cheap4. to study at a

university5. to go shopping6. house9. boyfriend, girlfriend12. with

Lesson 35

“What Do You Usually Do?”

Aims

• To practice talking about what someone usually does at a certain time of the day.

Vocabulary Review


bekerja to work lari to runberkunjung to visit (a place) masih stillbermain to play pulang to come homeke mana to where sedang in the process ofkuliah a lecture sepak bola football (soccer)lapangan field sarapan breakfast

“What do you usually do?”

In English there are many different ways you can ask someone what they usually do at a cer-tain time. For example, if you are speaking fairly formally you might say:

What do you usually do in the afternoon?If you are being a bit less formal you can say:

What are you up to in the afternoon? or perhaps What’s on at four o’clock?Indonesian also has many ways of asking this question. In everyday conversation you often

use the word acara apa? (what event? what program? what agenda? what is the particular thingyou plan to do?) or kegiatan apa? (what activity?). These are coupled with the verbs ada or punya.It is also very common to use ke mana (to where?). Study these examples that show how acara,kegiatan and ke mana can be used.

Pada sore hari biasanya ada acara apa? OR Pada sore hari biasanya Anda punya acara apa?In the late afternoon what program do you usually have?[In other words] What do you usually do in the late afternoon?

35

Lesson 35

Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari? OR Biasanya Anda punya kegiatan apa pada pagi hari?Usually, what activities do you have in the morning?[In other words] What do you usually do in the morning?

Pada siang hari biasanya Anda ke mana?In the afternoon where do you usually go?[In other words] What do you usually do in the afternoon?

Sesudah kuliah bahasa Inggris biasanya Anda pergi ke mana?After the English lecture, where do you usually go?[In other words] After the English lecture what do you usually do?

You can even ask this question in a more formal way using a formula that begins:Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan.... What do you usually do...

So... you can ask:

sesudah pulang dari kantorjam lima sore

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam delapan pagi ?jam sepuluh malamjam tiga siang

Here are some possible answers to these various questions in which you say what you do andwhere you do it.

tidur di rumahbelajar di perpustakaanbekerja di toko Sogolari pagi di taman kotabermain tenis di lapangan tenis

Biasanya saya (sedang) bersenam di gedung olahraga(masih) berenang di kolam renang

bermain sepak bola di lapangan olahragaberistirahat di rumahbersembahyang di musalaberkunjung ke rumah teman

Notice that in statements like these the adverb biasanya normally goes at the beginning of thesentence, though it is not wrong to put biasanya in the middle or at the end of the sentence. No-tice also that you can insert sedang or masih if you want to emphasise that what you are doing is“on-going” or “unfinished” at the hour mentioned.

If someone asks you what you usually do at a certain time of the day, you can begin your an-swer with Biasanya saya...... (Usually I .... ), then you can give more information by adding ....tetapi kadang-kadang saya..... (...but sometimes I ....).

Lesson 35

For example:Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi?What are you usually doing at seven in the morning?

Biasanya saya makan di dapur, tetapi kadang-kadang saya masih mandi.Usually I’m eating in the kitchen, but sometimes I’m still taking a bath.

Pada sore hari biasanya ada kegiatan apa?What do you usually do in the late afternoon?

Biasanya saya bersenam di gedung olahraga tetapi kadang-kadang saya pulang saja.Usually I work out at the sports hall, but sometimes I just go home.

Biasanya ada acara apa pada malam hari?What do you usually do at night?

Biasanya saya bercakap-cakap dengan teman tetapi kadang-kadang saya tidur saja.Usually I chat with friends, but sometimes I just go to bed.

Sesudah pulang dari kampus biasanya Anda punya acara apa?After coming home from the campus what do you usually do?

Biasanya saya lari dengan adik di taman.Usually I go for a run with my younger sister in the park.

Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada siang hari?Where do you usually go in the afternoon?

Biasanya saya tidak pergi ke mana-mana. Saya di kantor saja.Usually I don’t go anywhere. I just stay at the office.

Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada malam hari?What do you usually do at night?Biasanya saya bersembahyang di musala, lalu saya belajar di asrama.Usually I perform prayers in the prayer house, then I study in the dorm.

Lesson 35

Exercise 35-01

Answer each of the questions in this exercise with a complete sentence beginning with Biasa-nya saya... and containing an “add on” beginning with ....tetapi kadang-kadang saya.... Choosefrom among the verbs suggested below, and don’t forget to mention the name of a room or placeif appropriate. Also, try to give answers that tell what you personally actually do. Study this ex-ample first.

Question: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi?You may write: Biasanya saya sarapan, tetapi kadang-kadang saya masih tidur.

mandi, belajar, makan, minum, bercakap-cakap, bekerja, pulang, lari pagi, bermain (tenis / sepakbola), bersenam, berenang, beristirahat, bersembahyang, tidur, masak, berbelanja, bertemu

(dengan _____), pergi (ke ____), berkunjung (ke ____), kembali (dari ____)

1. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi? 2. Biasanya Anda punya acara apa pada siang hari? 3. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tiga sore? 4. Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana sesudah pulang dari kampus? 5. Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada sore hari? 6. Biasanya Anda punya kegiatan apa sesudah bermain sepak bola? 7. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam dua belas lewat seperempat siang? 8. Biasanya ada acara apa pada pagi hari? 9. Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada malam hari?

10. Biasanya ada acara apa sesudah makan siang?

Exercise 35-02

Complete the three sentences that follow each question drawing on the vocabulary, models and exercises in Lesson 34. Try to make your answers as diverse as possible, especially by using a variety of verbs and mentioning a variety of places.

1. Pertanyaan: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tujuh pagi?Jawaban: Pada pagi hari biasanya saya ....... Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga ......? Jawaban: Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga ......

2. Pertanyaan: Biasanya Anda punya acara apa pada siang hari?Jawaban: Jam sebelas pagi biasanya saya......Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga.....? Jawaban: Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya.....

3. Pertanyaan: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam tiga siang?Jawaban: Pada siang hari biasanya saya .........Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga......? Jawaban: Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya.......

Lesson 35

4. Pertanyaan: Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana sesudah pulang dari kampus?Jawaban: Sesudah pulang dari kampus? Biasanya saya......... Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga .........? Jawaban: Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga .........

5. Pertanyaan: Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada sore hari?Jawaban: Pada sore hari biasanya saya ......... Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga........? Jawaban: Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga.......

6. Pertanyaan: Biasanya Anda punya kegiatan apa sesudah bermain sepak bola?Jawaban: Sesudah bermain sepak bola? Wah, biasanya saya....... Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga..........? Jawaban: Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya..........

7. Pertanyaan: Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam dua belas lewat seperempat siang?

Jawaban: Hmmmm, biasanya saya.........Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah kadang-kadang Anda juga.........? Jawaban: Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga..........

8. Pertanyaan: Biasanya ada acara apa pada pagi hari?Jawaban: Kira-kira jam tujuh pagi biasanya saya ........ Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga .......? Jawaban: Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya........

9. Pertanyaan: Biasanya Anda pergi ke mana pada malam hari?Jawaban: .........Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga......? Jawaban: Tidak. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya..........

10. Pertanyaan: Biasanya ada acara apa sesudah makan siang?Jawaban: Sesudah makan siang, biasanya saya......... Pertanyaan: O begitu. Apakah Anda juga.........?Jawaban: Ya. Kadang-kadang saya juga..........

Ngapain belajar bahasa Indonesia? Sulit sih!

The word ngapain is pronounced with an initial sound like the “ng” in the middleof the English word “singing”. It is a very slangy word that originated in the local dia-lect of Jakarta but is now heard in slangy talk among young people right across thecountry. It means “what (is someone) doing?”. In some contexts it can mean “why?”,“what for?”, “what’s going on?” or “what’s the point?”. Often (but far from always) it

has overtones of sarcasm, indifference, cynicism, ridicule, scepticism or incredulity. Ngapain is

Lesson 35

formed from the base-word apa, with the informal verbal prefix ng- and the verbal suffix –in. Theprefix ng- and the suffix –in are both very common in informal usage, and we shall glance at moreexamples of them later in the book.

Study these examples.Ngapain kamu?What are you doing? / What are you up to?Nanti sore ngapain mereka?What are they doing this (late) afternoon?Ngapain belajar bahasa Indonesia? Sulit sih!Why would you want to study Indonesian? It’s tough!Ngapain pacaran sama dia!?Why would she want to be going out with him? Why would he want to be going out with her?

Dialogue

Listen to this short conversation in Sound File 035-01 between two young people andsavour its terse liveliness. It echoes the subject matter you studied earlier in the lesson butadopts the decidedly informal, even slangy, language you might hear in the streets ofJakarta. You have already met some of the informal words in the conversation: gimana, nggak,aja, jalan-jalan, sama, bisa, aku, ortu, kalo, O gitu, -mu, bilang, ama, sih. Check that you remembertheir meanings. If you get stuck, look at the translation.

Transcription

Ari Eh Wien, gimana kabarnya?

Wiwin Baik. Ke mana nih?

Ari Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem ngapain?

Wiwin Aku cuma di rumah aja. Emangnya kenapa?

Ari Mau nggak, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Wiwin Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar malem, apalagi ama kamu.

Ari O gitu. Makasih. Bilang makasih ama ortumu, ya.

Wiwin Ha ha ha. Kalian ngapain sih?

Ari Biasa. Cuma main badminton aja di Gedung Olahraga.

Lesson 35

Translation

Ari Hey, Wien, how are you?

Wiwin Fine. Where are you off to?

Ari Nowhere. Hey Wien, what are you up to tonight?

Wiwin I’ll just be at home. Why?

Ari Would you like to come with me to Joni’s place?

Wiwin Ohhh...I can’t. My parents don’t like if I go out at night, especially with you.

Ari Is that so. Well, thank you. Say thanks to your parents too, OK?

Wiwin Hahaha. What are you folks up to?

Ari The usual. Just playing badminton at the Sports Hall.

Further explanation

Eh Wien, gimana kabarnya? Wien: a contraction of Wiwien which in turn is an informal contraction of the young lady’s name, probably Winarti.gimana kabarnya: a colloquial equivalent of apa kabar?

Baik. Ke mana nih? When it is clear who is being addressed you don’t need a second-person pronoun like Anda, kamu or lu. nih: an informal variant of ini (just as tuh is an informal varianty of itu). Nih here adds a note of immediacy, something like “at the moment”.

Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem ngapain?

malem: an informal variant of malam.ngapain: what are you doing?

Aku cuma di rumah aja. Emangnya kenapa?

cuma: an informal substitute for hanya (only, just)kenapa: a common (and slightly more informal) variant of mengapa (why?)emangnya: from the formal memang (indeed). Emangnya kenapa has the force of “Why, what’s itto you?”

Mau nggak, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Mau nggak: “would you like to or not?”tempatnya Joni: tempat ‘place’ is often used instead of rumah.

Lesson 35

Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar malem, apalagi ama kamu.

ama: an informal substitute for bersama ‘together with’ or dengan ‘with’

O gitu. Makasih. Bilang makasihama ortumu, ya.

makasih: an informal variant of terima kasih

Ha ha ha. Kalian ngapain sih? kalian: the plural form of kamu.

Biasa. Cuma main badminton aja di Gedung Olahraga.

main: an informal variant of bermain (to play)



bermain to work masih a lecture berkunjung to play pulang field, open space bekerja to return, go home sedang soccer, footballkuliah to visit (a place) sepak bola stilllapangan in the process of...


Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

1. Pada malam hari biasanya ada acara apa?

a. Usually I am eating in the kitchen, but sometimes I am still taking a bath.

2. Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari?

b. What do you usually do at seven in themorning?

3. Pada siang hari biasanya Anda ke mana?

c. What activities are there/do you do in the morning?

4. Sesudah kuliah bahasa Inggris biasa-nya Anda pergi ke mana?

d. After the English lecture, where do youusually go?

5. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? e. What do you usually do?6. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam

tujuh pagi?f. What is usually going on in the even-

ing?7. Biasanya saya makan di dapur, tetapi

kadang-kadang saya masih mandi.g. Where do you usually go in the after-

noon?8. Pada sore hari biasanya ada kegiatan

apa?h. What activities do you usually do in

the late afternoon?

Lesson 35


Listen to the nine sentences in Sound File 035-02 and match them with thetranslations to the right.

a. After coming home from the campus what do you usually do?b. Usually I chat with friends, but sometimes I just go to bed.c. Usually I don’t go anywhere.d. Usually I go for a run with my younger sister in the park.e. Usually I perform prayers in the prayer house, then I study in my

apartment.f. Usually I work out at the sports hall, but sometimes I just go home.g. What do you usually do at night?h. Where do you usually go in the afternoon?


Reorder the Indonesian words below to say :

1. “What is usually going on in the late afternoon?”Pada—sore—hari—acara—ada—biasanya—apa?

2. “What activities do you typically do in the morning?”Biasanya—pada—ada—apa—kegiatan—pagi—hari

3. “After the English lecture, where do you usually go?”Sesudah—biasanya—kuliah—pergi—ke—Anda—bahasa Inggris—mana?

4. “What do you usually do after you come home from the office?”Apa—dari—pulang—yang—biasanya—Anda—sesudah—lakukan—kantor?

5. “What do you usually do at eight in the morning?”Apa—delapan—lakukan—yang—jam—biasanya—Anda—pagi?

Latihan 5—Pertanyaan & Jawaban

You will listen to five questions (Sound File 035-03). Only one answer is possible.

1. Recording 1A. Ya. Dan kadang-kadang saya juga berbelanja di Sarinah.B. Pada jam tujuh pagi biasanya saya sarapan.C. Jam tujuh malam biasanya saya makan malam.

Lesson 35

2. Recording 2A. Jam sebelas siang biasanya saya di kantor.B. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya di kampus.C. Jam delapan malam biasanya saya di rumah.

3. Recording 3A. Pada malam biasanya saya menonton film.B. Tetapi kadang-kadang saya makan dengan teman.C. Pada sore hari biasanya saya bekerja.

4. Recording 4A. Saya pergi ke kampus setiap hari.B. Sesudah pulang dari kampus, saya membersihkan rumah.C. Kadang-kadang saya tidak pergi ke kampus karena saya sakit.

5. Recording 5A. Sesudah bermain sepak bola, biasanya saya pulang ke rumah.B. Saya suka bermain sepak bola tetapi saya tidak selalu bermain dengan teman saya.C. Saya bermain sepak bola dengan teman saya setiap hari.

Latihan 6—Isian

Complete the dialogue. Note that the entire dialogue is held in Jakarta-style colloquial Indonesian. Choose from the following words: aja—ama—cuma—gimana—emangnya—kalian—main—makasih—malem—ngapain—nggak—nih

Wiwin & Ari

Ari Eh Wien, __________ kabarnya?

Wiwin Baik. Ke mana __________?

Ari Nggak ke mana-mana. Eh, Wien, nanti malem __________?

Wiwin Aku __________ di rumah aja. __________ kenapa?

Ari Mau __________, jalan-jalan sama aku ke tempatnya Joni.

Wiwin Wah... nggak bisa, aku. Ortu nggak mau kalo aku keluar __________, apalagi __________ kamu.

Ari O gitu. Makasih. Bilang __________ ama ortumu, ya.

Wiwin Ha ha ha. __________ ngapain sih?

Ari Biasa. Cuma __________ badminton __________ di Gedung Olahraga.

Lesson 35


Jodohkan kata-kata di sebelah kiri dengan definisinya di sebelah kanan.—Match the items onthe left to their definitions on the right.

1. gimana a. (informal variant of bersama) with, together with2. nggak b. a slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a

question or assertion3. aja c. (informal variant of saya) I, me4. jalan-jalan d. (informal variant of o begitu), Is that so? I see. Really.5. sama e. (informal variant of tidak), no, not6. aku f. (a slangy abbreviation of orang tua) parents7. ortu g. (informal variant of kamu) your8. o gitu h. (informal variant of berjalan-jalan) to go for a

walk/stroll, to wander about, to travel around9. -mu i. (informal variant of bagaimana), how, what is...like?

10. ama j. (informal variant of saja) just, only11. sih k. (informal variant of sama) with, together with

Latihan 8—Isian

Lengkapi teks berikut sesuai dengan rekaman.—Listen to Sound File 035-04 to fill inthe blanks. (Note: kami=we, hari libur=holiday)

Buku Harian

Hari ini hari libur dan aku punya banyak __________. Pada pagi hari, aku mau __________.

Aku suka __________, apalagi berenang, tapi __________ tidak buka. Jadi, aku dan te-manku __________ pagi di alun-alun. __________ lari, aku pulang ke __________.

Pada siang hari aku bertemu dengan pacarku di mal. Namanya Tomi. Kami sudah 2 ta-

hun __________. Kami biasa __________ banyak kegiatan bersama, seperti belajar, pergi ke kampus dan olahraga. Tomi suka sekali bermain __________. Kalau tidak ada yang

__________, kami biasanya berjalan-jalan saja di __________.

Pada sore hari, aku tidak punya __________ jadi aku hanya __________ di apartemen.

Lesson 35

Latihan 9—Teka Teki Silang (TTS)Mendatar:2. in the process of...3. to go shopping4. Muslim prayer room5. to visit (a place)8. to do (something)9. to pray, to worship11. to work12. still13. difficult, hard to do14. to cook15. to go/come homeMenurun:1. to play3. to rest, to take a

break6. a lecture, to study at

a university7. to swim8. field, open space 9. to work out, to do

gymnastics10. to sleep, to go to

bed11. to meet

Lesson 36

What Do You Do In Your Free Time?

Aims

• To practice talking about recreational activities.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent words used in thislesson that have appeared in previous lessons. Makesure that you remember their meanings.

acara agenda, eventbagaimana kalau what if...berenang to swimberistirahat to restbersembahyang to praybersenam to work outdi samping besidekegiatan an activitylapangan a fieldmungkin possiblytidak usah don’t need to

Talking About Free Time and Days Off

Here are some ways of asking about spare time, free time or leisure time:Biasanya ada acara apa pada hari libur?What’s usually on the agenda on your day off?

Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan kalau tidak bekerja atau belajar?What do you usually do if you are not working or studying?

Kalau Anda tidak bekerja apakah Anda hanya beristirahat saja?If you’re not working, do you just rest (and do nothing else)?

Apakah Anda suka berolahraga pada waktu senggang?Do you enjoy playing sport in your free time?

Ibu dan Anak Bermain Congklak © Mathieu Castel

36

Lesson 36

Kalau tidak bekerja Anda suka berjalan-jalan ke mana?If you’re not working, where do you like to go (for recreational purposes)?

Saya suka sekali berbelanja pada waktu senggang. Kalau Anda bagaimana?I love shopping in my spare time. What about you?

Pacar saya suka sekali bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang, tetapi saya lebih suka pergi ke bioskop.My girlfriend/boyfriend loves working in the garden in her/his spare time, but I prefer to go to the cinema.

Kalau Anda tidak pergi ke kampus biasanya ada kegiatan apa?If you don’t go to the campus, what activities do you have?

Pada waktu senggang apakah Anda suka pergi ke Gedung Olahraga atau kolam renang?In your spare time, do you like to go to the sports ground or the swimming pool?

Each of these questions can be varied. Here are some examples. See if you can add moreitems to the substitution columns.

kalau tidak bekerja?Apa yang Anda lakukan pada hari libur?

kalau tidak mau belajar?

pergi ke kantor?Biasanya ada kegiatan apa kalau Anda tidak bekerja atau belajar?

bertemu dengan teman?

tidur saja?Kalau tidak bekerja, apakah Anda hanya beristirahat saja?

tinggal di rumah saja?

berenangApakah Anda suka berolahraga pada waktu senggang?

pergi ke ...

pergiKalau tidak bekerja, Anda suka berjalan-jalan ke mana?

berkunjung

rumahDi samping di mesjid, apakah Anda juga bersembahyang di musala ?

kantor

Lesson 36

bermain tenisSaya suka sekali berbelanja pada waktu senggang. Kalau Anda bagaimana?

naik bus ke ...

tinggal di rumah

Pacar saya suka sekali bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang, tetapi saya lebih suka ...

masak di dapur

Exercise 36-01

Listen to Sound File 036-01 and then read this passage through carefully severaltimes. Try to remember it as best you can.

Hari Libur

ari ini hari libur. Tidak ada kuliah, pasar sepi, anak-anak tidak masuk sekolah, kantorpemerintah tutup. Pada hari libur biasanya saya di rumah saja, tetapi kadang-kadang

kami sekeluarga berjalan-jalan ke kampung. Tadi pagi saya ke mal bersama dengan temansaya Astuti. Toko-toko ramai sekali. Saya dan Astuti suka minum kopi di kafe. Saya sukakopi manis asal Jawa, tetapi Astuti lebih suka kopi susu asal Sulawesi. Harganya cukup ma-hal, kira-kira Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue. Kalau di warung biasa tidak sampai Rp.3.000.

H

Once you have almost memorised the text do the exercise below without referring back to thetext above.

My Holiday

Today is a holiday. The university is closed, the market is empty, the children don’t go to school, and the government offices are closed. On holidays I usually just stay at home, but once in a while our whole family goes to visit the village. This morning I went to the shopping mall together with my friend Astuti. The shops were very crowded. Astuti and I like to have a coffee in a café. I like Javanese coffee with sugar, but Astuti prefers coffee from Sulawesi. It’s pretty ex-pensive, a cup of coffee and a piece of cake cost about Rp. 50,000. In a foodstall it would be less than Rp. 3,000.

Hari ini hari _________. Tidak ada kuliah, pa-sar _________, anak-anak tidak masuk seko-lah, kantor pemerintah _________. Pada hari libur biasanya saya di rumah _________, teta-pi kadang-kadang kami _________ berjalan--jalan ke kampung. _________ saya ke mal _________ teman saya Astuti. Toko-toko _________. Saya dan Astuti _________ minum kopi di kafe. Saya suka kopi manis asal Jawa,tetapi Astuti _________ kopi susu asal Sula-wesi. Harganya _________ mahal, _________ Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue. Kalau di wa-rung biasa tidak sampai Rp. 3.000.

Lesson 36

Se-

In combination with a noun, the prefix se- sometimes takes on the meaning “all..., the whole...”Tetapi kadang-kadang kami sekeluarga berjalan-jalan ke kampung.But sometimes the whole family travels to the village (i.e. the family’s hometown).

Dialogue: Ibu Gah & Ida

Listen to Sound File 036-02 – a dialogue between Ibu Gah (64 years old) and Ida (19years old). After that, read the transcription and try memorise the conversation asmuch as you can. If you forget some words, take a quick peek at the transcription.Say the Indonesian text out loud until you can pronounce all words correctly and smoothly.

Ibu Gah

Ida, hari ini hari libur. Biasanya kamupergi ke mana pada hari libur?

Hari libur? Biasanya saya beristirahatsaja di rumah.

IdaHah? Beristirahat di rumah? Ibu kira kamu pasti berenang di kolam re-nang atau lari pagi.

Ya, memang, kadang-kadang saya lari pagi di taman.

O begitu. Apakah kamu juga suka bersenam di Gedung Olahraga?

Kadang-kadang. Kalau Ibu bagaima-na? Apakah Ibu juga suka berolahra-ga?

Tidak. Ibu lebih suka masak di ru-mah atau bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang.

Bu... Ibu tidak boleh tinggal di rumahsaja. Apakah Ibu mau berjalan-jalan dengan saya di taman?

Terima kasih, Ida. Ibu sudah tua! Ibu suka beristirahat di rumah. Kadang--kadang Ibu juga berbelanja di Mal Taman Cempaka.

Katanya di Taman Cempaka ada res-toran yang enak. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Ibu ke mal?

Boleh, Ida. Ibu mau ke Taman Cem-paka sekarang. Tetapi katanya kamumau lari pagi.

Ah, tidak usah, Bu. Saya lebih suka ikut Ibu ke mal. Siapa tahu bisa ma-kan enak dengan Ibu.

With a classmate or a tutor, practice this conversation and see if you can repeat it perfectlywithout looking back at the script.

Lesson 36

In Your Free Time or On Your Day Off

Imagine you are sitting in a coffee shop (warung kopi) after a long day’s work or study. The conversation turns to recreation. What do you do in your free time (pada waktu senggang) oron a public day off / public holiday (pada hari libur) or when you are not working or studying?

☞☞ To ask about...

• what someone usually does use ...apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan?or ...biasanya Anda pergi ke mana?or ...biasanya ada kegiatan apa?or ...biasanya ada acara apa?

• where something is done use Di mana...?• what time something is done use Jam berapa...?• with whom something is done use ...dengan siapa?• whether someone does something use Apakah Anda...?• how long you do something use Berapa lama...?• what (kind of) sport, food etc. use ...apa (e.g. olahraga apa? what sport?)

☞☞ To talk about what you...

• would like to do use mau• can do use bisa or dapat• like to do use suka• prefer to do use lebih suka• usually do use biasanya

☞☞ You can talk about the times when you do something, for example...

• the times of the day use jam..., pada pagi hari, pada siang hari, pada sore hari, pada malam hari

• today use hari ini, nanti siang, nanti sore, nanti malam

☞☞ You can talk about categories of recreational, or leisure-time, activity...

• staying at home use tinggal, beristirahat, masak, bekerja, belajar• going somewhere use pergi, kembali, pulang, naik ___ ke...,

berkunjung ke..., bertemu dengan...• physical exertion use lari pagi, berenang, berjalan kaki, bersenam naik

sepeda, berolahraga, bermain sepak bola, bermain tenis, bermain badminton

• indulging yourself use makan, minum, berbelanja, bercakap-cakap, tidur, pergi ke pesta, duduk di warung kopi

Lesson 36

☞☞ You can talk about places and people...

• around the house use di + rumah, dapur, kebun, garasi, apartemen• in town use di + taman, mal, toko, restoran, bioskop, hotel• at sports facilities use di + lapangan tenis, kolam renang, gedung

olahraga• family use dengan + keluarga, suami, istri, orang tua, anak,

ibu, ayah, kakak, adik• friends and pets use dengan + pacar, teman, mahasiswa, anjing,

kucing

☞☞ You can add authentic life to the conversation with these words...

• exclamations use Hah!? Aduh! Bagus! Wah!• “I’m listening” use O begitu, Memang, Baik• connectors use juga, dan, atau, kalau begitu, di samping...• giving your opinion use tetapi, saya kira, katanya, o ya, saya lebih suka...

Kalau Anda bagaimana?• making suggestions use Apakah Anda mau...? Bagaimana kalau..., Ayo...

tidak usah...

From this list of “pointers” you can generate literally millions of unique combinations. Thepointers are sifted from all the previous lessons in The Indonesian Way, but review of Lessons 32–36 will be of special help to you as sources of vocabulary, grammar, and sentences that you canuse to liven up the present role play.

Talk about your own habits, preferences and opinions, but don’t try to say more than your cur-rent command of Indonesian permits you to say. In other words, tailor your ideas to the languageresources you have mastered. If you try to say more than you are currently capable of saying youwill feel frustrated, the conversation may die, or worst of all, you will drop into English. Avoid thisas far as you can by talking fluently and correctly within the parameters you have practised to thispoint.

If necessary keep the list of pointers before you to glance at from time to time. But as soon asyou can, let go of it and “fly” by yourself. Repeat the role play several times, each time striving forsmoother fluency, greater correctness and more variation.

You will find there is a lot you can say with the resources sketched above. Challenge yourself.How many minutes can you and your partner talk in correct Indonesian without pausing or drop-ping into English? Set a target, and time yourself with a clock or stopwatch. Each time you repeatthe role play try to break your record.

Lesson 36



acara agenda, event bersenam possibly, maybeberenang activity di samping to swimberistirahat besides kegiatan to praybersembahyang to work out mungkin to rest

Latihan 2—To talk about what you...

Match the topic with the most appropriate Indonesian phrase.

1. want, would like to do a. biasanya 2. can do b. lebih suka3. like to do c. suka4. prefer to do d. mau5. usually do e. bisa, dapat

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan: To ask about...

Match the topic with the most appropriate Indonesian phrase.

1. what someone usually does a. Jam berapa...2. where something is done b. Di mana...3. what time something is done c. Berapa lama...4. with whom something is done d. Apakah Anda...5. whether someone does some-

thinge. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan

6. how long you do something f. ...dengan siapa7. what (kind of) sport, food, etc. g. ...apa (e.g. olahraga apa)



1. hari libur a. quiet, lonely, deserted2. kalau Anda bagaimana b. to really like, to love (doing sth.) 3. pasti c. definetely, sure to be

Lesson 36

4. sepi d. not allowed to, shouldn’t5. suka sekali e. a day off, a holiday6. tidak boleh f. a sports ground/field7. tidak usah g. what about you8. lapangan olahraga h. free time, spare time9. waktu senggang i. (yes) indeed

10. memang j. don’t need to, shouldn’t bother to

Latihan 5—Menyimak

Jodohkanlah rekaman dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.—Match the elevensentences of Sound File 036-03 with the sentences in the right column.

1. a. Do you enjoy playing sports in your free time?2. b. I love shopping in my spare time.3. c. I prefer to go to the cinema.4. d. If you don’t go to the campus, what activities do you have?5. e. If you’re not working, do you just rest (and do nothing else?)6. f. If you’re not working, where do you like to go?7. g. In your spare time, do you like to go to the sports ground or the

swimming pool? 8. h. My boyfriend loves working in the garden in his spare time.9. i. What about you?

10. j. What do you usually do if you are not working or studying?11. k. What’s usually on the agenda on your day off?

Latihan 6—Benar Salah

Based on the dialogue between Ida and Bu Gah, which of the following statements are true (benar) and which are false (salah)?

1. On holidays Ida usually stays at home.A. BenarB. Salah

2. On holidays Ida usually does some gardening.A. BenarB. Salah

3. Ibu Gah is surprised that Ida is not more active.A. BenarB. Salah

Lesson 36

4. Ida wants to go to the swimming pool.A. BenarB. Salah

5. Because she is already old, Ibu Gah does not engage in sports.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Ida likes the idea of going to the mall because she hopes the food will be good there.A. BenarB. Salah

Latihan 7—Jawab Pertanyaan

Translate the highlighted words or phrases.

Ibu Gah Ida, Today is a holiday. Where do you usually go on a holiday?Ida On a holiday? Usually I stay home and take a rest.Ibu Gah What? Staying at home to take a rest? I thought you would certainly go to a swim-

ming pool or do some jogging in the morning. Ida Yes, that’s right, sometimes I run in the park. Do you also like sports?Ibu Gah No. I rather cook at home or spend my leisure time working in the garden.Ida Ma’am... You shouldn’t stay home all the time. Do you want to take a walk with me

in the park?Ibu Gah Thank you, Ida. I am already old! I prefer resting at home. Sometimes I like to shop

at Taman Cempaka Mall.Ida I heard there’s a delicious restaurant at Taman Cempaka. Can I join you to the

mall?Ibu Gah Sure, Ida. I want to go now to Taman Cempaka. But you said you wanted to run in

the morning.Ida Oh... that’s not important, Ma’am. I rather go with you to the mall. Who knows the

food may be yummie.

Latihan 8—Isian: Percakapan

Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat:—ikut—taman—bersenam—juga—senggang—pergi—beristirahat—saja—Katanya—berenang—berolahraga

Ibu Gah

Ida, hari ini hari libur. Biasanya kamu __________ ke mana pada hari libur?

Hari libur? Biasanya saya __________ saja di rumah.

IdaHah? Beristirahat di rumah? Ibu kira kamu pasti __________ di kolam renang atau lari pagi.

Ya, memang, kadang-kadang saya lari pagi di __________.

Lesson 36

O begitu. Apakah kamu juga suka __________ di Gedung Olahraga?

Kadang-kadang. Kalau Ibu bagaimana? Apakah Ibu juga suka __________?

Tidak. Ibu lebih suka masak di rumah atau bekerja di kebun pada waktu __________.

Bu... Ibu tidak boleh tinggal di rumah __________. Apakah Ibu mau berjalan-jalan dengan saya di taman?

Terima kasih, Ida. Ibu sudah tua! Ibu suka beristirahat di rumah. Kadang-kadang Ibu __________ berbelanja di Mal Taman Cempaka.

__________ di Taman Cempaka adarestoran yang enak. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Ibu ke mal?

Boleh, Ida. Ibu mau ke Taman Cempaka sekarang. Tetapi katanyakamu mau lari pagi.

Ah, tidak usah, Bu. Saya lebih suka__________ Ibu ke mal. Siapa tahu bisa makan enak dengan Ibu.



1. “Do you enjoy playing sport in your free time?”Apakah—berolahraga—waktu—pada—suka—Anda—senggang?

2. “If you’re not working, where do you like to go (for recreational purposes)?”Kalau—ke—suka—berjalan-jalan—tidak—Anda—bekerja,—mana?

3. “I love shopping in my spare time.”Saya—waktu—pada—suka—berbelanja—sekali—senggang.

4. “My girlfriend/boyfriend loves working in the garden in his/her spare time.”Pacar—waktu—sekali—bekerja di kebun—suka—saya—pada—senggang.

5. “What do you do on the holiday?”Apa—pada—hari—Anda—lakukan—yang—libur?

6. “This morning I went to the Fajar Shop with my friend Astuti.”Tadi—Toko Fajar—dengan—saya—teman saya—pagi—bersama—ke—Astuti.

7. “It’s pretty expensive, about Rp.50.000 for a coffee and a cake.Harganya—untuk—mahal,—kopi—kira-kira—dan—cukup—Rp.50.000—kue.

Lesson 36

Latihan 19—Teka Teki Silang (TTS)

Mendatar:1. to swim4. to rest, to

take a break5. garden6. cat8. to work out,

to do gymnastics

11. to study13. agenda,

(radio, TV) program

15. university student

16. familyMenurun:1. to pray2. wife3. to go7. to work9. activity10. husband12. dog14. to cook

Lesson 37

What Did You Do Last Night?

Aims

• To give practice asking and answering questions about some particular events.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the fre-quent words used in this les-son that have appeared in pre-vious lessons. Make sure thatyou remember their meanings.

acara program, event kira-kira approximatelyatau or pasti definitelyberenang to swim pesta partyberistirahat to rest pulang to go homeberkunjung (ke...) to visit (a place) pusat the centrebersembahyang to pray seperti biasa as usualbertemu to meet susu milkhanya only warung streetside stallkamu you

More on “What Time?” and “Where?”

You know already that “What time?” is Jam berapa? and Where? is Di mana? In the questionJam berapa Anda ke kantor? the person asking the question knows that you will be going to youroffice, but she doesn’t know the time. In Indonesian, the information that is unknown is generally

Mesjid Gede Kauman di Yogyakarta. © ChrisSteph LewisBoegeman

37

Lesson 37

the subject of the sentence (marked red) whereas the known information is put in the predicate(marked blue):

Jam berapa Anda ke kantor? Jam sebelas saya ke kantor.What time do you go to your office? I am going to my office at eleven o’clock.

Di mana Mesjid Gede? Di Yogyakarta Mesjid Gede.Where is the Grand Mosque? The Grand Mosque is in Yogyakarta.

The position of subject and predicate can generally be reversed without altering the meaning:

Anda ke kantor jam berapa? Saya ke kantor jam sebelas.What time do you go to your office? I am going to my office at eleven o’clock.

Mesjid Gede di mana? Mesjid Gede di Yogyakarta.Where is the Grand Mosque? The Grand Mosque is in Yogyakarta.

Please note that there is no question-answer pattern. If the question has the subject in initialposition, the answer may as well have the predicate in initial position: position of subject and pre-dicate can generally be reversed in Indonesian without altering the meaning:

Di mana Mesjid Gede? Mesjid Gede di Yogyakarta.

Here are some more options for asking “what time?” and “where?”. Practise generating ques-tions and answers from the sentence shells below. Make as many different combinations as youcan from the various columns. Add to the choices in each column by borrowing from the sen-tence shells in Lesson 32 and other recent lessons. You can include or exclude mau and akan ac-cording to what you want to say. Biasanya can fit in to these shells at various points too—espe-cially at the beginning of the sentence, after jam berapa and at the end of the sentence.

lari pagiteman Anda bermain tenis di gedung olahraga

Jam berapa Anda (akan) bersenam di kolam renang ?pacar Anda (mau) berenang di taman kotaibu Anda berolahraga di lapangan olahraga

beristirahat

guru Anda berkunjung ke apartemenJam berapa Anda (akan) bersembahyang di Pusat Mahasiswa ?

suami Anda (mau) beristirahat di mesjidmusala

In your answer you can simply say the time, or you can “echo” the question.

Guru saya (akan) bermain tenis di lapangan olahraga.Saya (jam tujuh) (mau) bersembahyang di musala jam tujuh.Pacar saya berenang di kolam renang

Lesson 37

“What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?”

The Indonesian term for “last night” is tadi malam. You have the language resources to ask and answer questions about what someone did last night. Study these examples.

Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam?What time did you get home last night?

Saya pulang jam sebelas.I came home at eleven o’clock.

Kamu ke mana tadi malam?Where did you go last night?

Saya ke pesta di rumah teman.I went to a party at a friend’s place.

Kamu pergi ke pesta itu dengan siapa?Who did you go to the party with?

Saya pergi ke pesta dengan Arif.I went to the party with Arif.

Apakah kamu minum bir atau anggur tadi malam?Did you drink beer or wine last night?

Saya minum bir dan anggur.I drank beer and wine.

Di mana kamu minum?Where did you drink?

Di rumah teman.At my friend’s place.

Kamu pulang naik apa?How did you come home (i.e. by what mode of transport)?

Saya pulang naik sepeda motor.I came home by motor bike.

Study the model dialogue below. There are two characters in it. One is a suspicious mother,the other a wayward son. Notice the use of these new phrases:

Saya tidak percaya.I don’t believe it/you.Pasti kamu....You are bound to have... / You must have... There’s no doubt in my mind that you...Nanti dulu.Just a moment. / Hang on a sec.

Now to the dialogue.

Lesson 37

Dialogue

Notice how the wayward son appears to be somewhat devious, or perhaps a bit nervous abouttelling the full truth. Notice also that the mother addresses her son with the informal, “speak-ing-down” pronoun kamu (the son could never address his mother with kamu) and refers to her-self with the “speaking-down” pronoun aku. In the usual fashion, after listening to the sound filevery carefully, without looking at the transcription, try to say the Indonesian text out loud. If youget stuck, look at the translation to get the English equivalent. Keep practising until you can saythe Indonesian without error and, if possible, without being prompted by having to glance at theEnglish translation.

Before reading the following transcription, listen to Sound File 037-01 and answer the following questions:

1. What time did the boy go home?2. What did he play at the Sports Hall?3. With whom was he there?4. Did he drink alcohol?5. How did he get home?

Bu Yanti

Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam? Saya pulang kira-kira jam delapan, Bu.

SuryoJam delapan? Aku tidak percaya! Kamu pergi ke mana tadi malam?

Saya pergi ke gedung olahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis.

O begitu. Kamu bermain dengan siapa?

Dengan teman saya Tanti.

Pasti kamu ke rumah Tanti. Tidak, Bu. Saya hanya bermain bulu tangkis dengan Tanti di gedung olahraga.

Hmmm. Apakah kamu minum alkohol tadi malam?

Tidak, Bu. Saya minum susu saja di gedung olahraga.

Nanti dulu. Apakah ada rumah makan atau warung di gedung olahraga? Saya kira tidak ada.

Ada, Bu. Ada warung kecil di belakanggedung.

O begitu. Kamu pulang naik apa? Naik sepeda, Bu, seperti biasa.

Hah? Pasti kamu pulang naik sepeda motor dengan Tanti.

O tidak, Bu. Tadi malam saya capai sekali. Saya pulang jam delapan naik sepeda.

Hmmm. Ternyata kamu anak yang baik.

Translation

Bu Yanti

What time did you get home last night?

I got home about eight o’clock, mother.

SuryoAbout eight o’ clock? I don’t believe it!Where did you go last night?

I went to the sports hall. I played badminton.

Lesson 37

Really? Who did you play with? With my friend Tanti.

You must have gone to Tanti’s place. No, mother. I only played badminton with Tanti in the sport hall.

Did you drink alcohol last night? No, mother. I had some milk at the sports hall.

Just a moment. Is there a restaurant or eatery at the sports hall? I don’t think there is.

Yes, there is, mother. There is a small eatery behind the sports hall.

I see. How did you come home? By bicycle, mother, as always.

What? You definitely came home by motorbike with Tanti.

Oh, no I didn’t, mother. I was very tiredlast night. I came home at eight o’clock by bicycle.

Hmmm. It would appear that you are agood boy after all.

Exercise 37-01

Answer the following questions using your own words. You should not follow the storyline asin the above dialogue but invent your own.

1. Jam berapa Anda pulang tadi malam? 2. Anda pergi ke mana tadi malam? 3. Anda pergi ke lapangan olahraga dengan siapa? 4. Apakah Anda minum wiski tadi malam? 5. Di mana Anda minum? 6. Anda pulang naik apa? 7. Apakah Anda bertemu dengan Susi tadi malam? 8. Siapa nama teman Anda? 9. Jam berapa Anda pergi ke klab malam tadi malam?

10. Ada acara apa tadi malam?

Role Play: “What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?”

Indonesian parents and the landladies in charge of student boarding houses are often verystrict and conservative, and will often interrogate children or lodgers – even if they are youngadults – about their personal lives. With your teacher/tutor or with a classmate, role play a vari-ation of the above dialogue. There will be two characters in the role play: perhaps (as above) aworried parent and a wayward son/daughter, or perhaps a stern landlady and a wayward younglodger.

The interrogator should put his/her questions aggressively and respond to answers with scepti-cism. The wayward child/lodger should give humorously devious answers. To bring the role playto life, make sure that you have thoroughly mastered all the relevant vocabulary and sentence

Lesson 37

shells and can produce them without thinking too much. Play the dialogue for laughs, whetherbelly-laughs or subtle laughs. Squeeze as much melodramatic emotion from it as you can.

Ucapan: More practice with /h/ in the final position

As we have seen previously, when /h/ appears at the end of a syllable it isvery lightly, but audibly, breathed. Try saying these sentences, audibly breath-ing the final /h/ sound.

Don’t forget to also roll the /r/, suppress aspiration, and pronounce each syl-lable with roughly equal stress but with some extra stress on the second-to-last syllable (exceptwhere that syllable has an unstressed /ə/ sound in it). Listen to Sound File 037-02.

✗ Rumah Ibu Gah putih.✗ Sudah jam setengah tujuh.✗ Sekolah menengah desa Suruh.✗ Apakah buah itu murah?✗ Apakah gedung pemerintah itu jauh dari sini?✗ Ayah bertanya: “Apakah saya boleh makan buah ini?”✗ Tujuh tambah sepuluh itu tujuh belas.✗ Rumah sakit ini bersih dan murah.


acara agenda, event kira-kira to swimatau approximately pasti to return homeberenang you (informal) pesta party, festivityberistirahat only pulang ordinary, normalberkunjung (ke...) centre pusat definitelybersembahyang to visit (a place) seperti to meetbertemu or biasa stall, eateryhanya to pray susu askamu to take a rest warung milk



1. Saya tidak percaya. a. As usual.2. Pasti kamu minum, ya b. I don’t think there is one.3. Nanti dulu. c. I see.4. O begitu. d. I’m pretty sure there is one.

Lesson 37

5. Seperti biasa. e. I’m sure you had a sip.6. Saya kira ada. f. I don’t believe you.7. Saya kira tidak ada. g. Hang on a sec.

Latihan 3—Isian

Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: belakang—berapa—capai—gedung—hanya—kira—kira-kira—makan—minum—naik—pasti—percaya—pulang—seperti—siapa—susu—tadi—teman—ternyata

Bu Yanti Suryo

Jam ___________ kamu pulang tadi malam?

Saya pulang ___________ jam delapan, Bu.

Jam delapan? Aku tidak __________! Kamu pergi ke mana ___________ malam?

Saya pergi ke ___________ olahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis.

O begitu. Kamu bermain dengan ___________?

Dengan ___________ saya Tanti.

___________ kamu ke rumah Tanti. Tidak, Bu. Saya ___________ bermain bulu tangkis dengan Tanti di gedung olahraga.

Hmmm. Apakah kamu ___________ alkohol tadi malam?

Tidak, Bu. Saya minum ___________ saja di gedung olahraga.

Nanti dulu. Apakah ada rumah ___________ atau warung di gedung olahraga? Saya ___________ tidak ada.

Ada, Bu. Ada warung kecil di ___________ gedung.

O begitu. Kamu ___________ naik apa? Naik sepeda, Bu, ___________ biasa.Hah? Pasti kamu pulang __________ sepeda motor dengan Tanti.

O tidak, Bu. Tadi malam saya ___________ sekali. Saya pulang jam delapan naik sepeda.

Hmmm. ___________ kamu anak yang baik.

Latihan 4—Pemahaman

Refer to the narrative to answer the following questions.

1. At what time the boy came home last nightA. 6B. 7C. 8D. 9

Lesson 37

2. What did the mother say to show her disbelief to her son?A. “Jam berapa kamu pulang tadi malam?”B. “O begitu.”C. “Aku tidak percaya.”D. “Kamu pergi ke mana tadi malam?”

3. What did the son do at the sport hall?A. He drank a lot of beer.B. He played badminton.C. He had a date with Tanti.D. He sold beverages in a small shop behind the sport hall.

4. Did the son drink alcohol last night?A. He drank lots of alcohol.B. He drank alcohol but just a little.C. He did not drink any alcohol.D. He drank alcohol and milk.

5. How did the son feel after going back from the sport hall?A. dizzyB. tiredC. upsetD. excited

Latihan 5—Matching: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban

Dengarkan rekaman berikut dan pilih jawaban yang tepat.—Listen to Sound File037-03 and choose the correct answer.

1. a. Saya pulang naik sepeda motor. 2. b. Di rumah teman.3. c. Saya minum bir dan anggur.4. d. Saya pulang jam sebelas.5. e. Saya pergi ke pesta dengan Arif.6. f. Saya ke pesta di rumah teman.


Urutkan kata-kata berikut sehingga menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti:

1. “What time do you go jogging?”Anda—lari pagi?—berapa—Jam

2. “What time will your friend go to the night club?”pergi—berapa—teman—klab malam?—Jam—akan—ke—Anda

3. “What time does your boyfriend want to swim in the swimming pool?”berapa?—mau—kolam renang—jam—di—Pacar Anda—berenang

Lesson 37

4. “What time does your husband want to visit the University Student Center?”jam—berapa?—mau—ke—Pusat Mahasiswa—berkunjung—Suami Anda

5. “What time do you want to pray at the small mosque?”bersembahyang—musala?—Anda—di—mau—Jam—berapa


Mendatar:1. to say/do your prayers3. roughly/approximately4. to swim7. apparently8. milk10. a party12. to believe14. a small streetside eatery17. plans, a TV/radio

program18. you (informal)19. or20. the centreMenurun:1. to take a break2. to visit (a place)5. to meet6. to come/go home9. only11. all; all of them13. tired15. glass16. definitely

Lesson 38

Days Of The Week

Aims

• To introduce and practise the names of thedays of the week.

• To practise determining a day, hour andplace to meet.

Vocabulary Review


bagaimana kalau... what about ikut to come along

berbicara to speak jam berapa what time

bertemu to meet pulang to go home

boleh allowed to, may tanggal date

bulu tangkis badminton

The Days of the Week

These are the days of the week in Indonesian. Notice that the names of the days are frequentlypreceded by the “marker word” hari (day).

Senin Selasa Rabu Kamis Jumat Sabtu MingguMonday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday

Besok & Kemarin

Kemarin dulu Kemarin Hari ini Besok Lusa

Senin, 3 Mei Selasa, 4 Mei Rabu, 5 Mei Kamis, 6 Mei Jumat, 7 Mei

Besok is ‘tomorrow’, kemarin is ‘yesterday’, lusa is ‘the day after tomorrow’ and kemarin dulu is‘the day before yesterday’.

38

Lesson 38

Mohon Perhatian!!

If you want to ask what day it is you say: Hari apa hari ini?orHari ini hari apa?What day is it today?

You can also say:Hari apa kemarin?Kemarin hari apa?What day was it yesterday?Hari apa besok?Besok hari apa?What day is it tomorrow?

You might answer these questions with sentences like these:Hari ini hari Minggu.Today is SundayKemarin hari Sabtu.Yesterday was Saturday.Kemarin dulu hari Jumat.The day before yesterday was Friday.Besok hari Senin.Tomorrow is Monday.Lusa hari Selasa.The day after tomorrow is Tuesday.

You can also mention the date on which a certain day falls. Tanggal is the marker word thatappears in front of a date when the date is expressed as a number in a month. So you can say:

Senin tanggal tujuh MeiMonday the 7th of May

Lesson 38

Jumat tanggal delapan belas JuniFriday the 18th of June

(There will be more practice of tanggal and the names of months in Module 4.)When you are talking about something that happened on a particular day or date, the day or

date is usually (but not always) preceded by the preposition pada. Pada can correspond to manydifferent English prepositions, but when it is used in front of dates and the names of days it isusually the same as the English “on”.

pada hari Rabuon Wednesdaypada hari Sabtu tanggal tiga belason Saturday the 13th.

Cara Indonesia: The Confusing World of Calendars

Even the humble calendar reveals something of Indonesia’s extraordinary diversity and itscomplex cultural history. Look at this page from an ordinary calendar which shows the month ofMay of the year 1997 C.E.

You will notice that under the number represent-ing each date in the month there is other informa-tion. You will find the name of the correspondingday in the Javanese five day week (Kliwon, Legi,Pahing, Pon and Wage). To the left and right of thisday is the date in the current Javanese month andthe current month according to the Islamic of Hijricalendar. On the far right you will find the names ofthese months and the current year in the Javaneseand Muslim chronologies.

As May 1997 covers two Javanese months (Besar and Sura), and two Hijri months (Dzulhijjahand Muharram). Dzulhijjah, also spelled Dhu al-Ḥijjah is the twelfth and final month in theHijri cal-endar. Therefore 1 Muharraam A.H. is the first day of the first month of the Hijri calendar and 1Muharram 1418 corresponds with 1 Sura 1929 in the Javanese calendar. As both the Hijri and theJavanese calendars are lunar calendars, their dates either correspond of differ by a day only. Youcan read more about this at http://www.kalenderjawa.com where the Hijri, Javanese, and Greorgi-an calendars are displayed next to each other.

The last day of the month in the example below is Saturday 31 May 1997, or Sabtu tanggal tigapuluh satu Mei tahun seribu sembilan ratus sembilan puluh tujuh. The calendar shows that thesame day is also Legi the twenty-fourth of Besar in the Javanese calendar, and Saturday (Sabtu)the ninth of Muharram in the Hijri calendar.

As the world celebrated the arrival of a new millennium on 1 January 2000, an Indonesian cal-endar would have shown that in the Hijri era we were in the year 1420, in the Javanese calendar itwas 1932, and in the Balinese calendar it was 1920.

The Hijri calendar is widely used for religious purposes in Indonesia. It is based on cycles ofthe moon, not the sun as the European or Gregorian calendar is. The lunar year is shorter bysome 11 days than a year in the international solar calendar. Islamic feast days, which are themost important holidays for most Indonesians, are celebrated according to the Hijri calendar, sothe celebration of them shifts forward by (usually) 11 days each year in the international

Lesson 38

European/Gregorian calendar, slightly complicated by leap years in both calendar systems. Manymillions of Javanese and Balinese also regularly consult their own Javanese and Balinese calen-dars, especially to keep track of market days and to regulate ritual life.

There is much more to the Javanese and Balinese calendars (and their counterparts in otherregional traditions) than introduced here. In fact there are ‘weeks’ numbering from two to tendays, the most important of which is the six-day week. Together, the five-, six-, and seven-dayweeks form a repeating cycle of 210 days (5x6x7), divided into 30 named weeks called wuku, thatis used as the basis for numerological calculations important in determining when and where toschedule important events like weddings and other rites of passage, business trips, and other sig-nificant decisions in life. Most people know the day on which they were born as expressed inthese three interlocked cycles, although fewer and fewer Indonesians depend on such calcula-tions as time passes.

Making an Appointment

Want to invite someone to do something with you? We have already studied how you can dothis in Module 1 (Lesson 13) and in Lesson 33 in the current module. You will recall that you prac-tised sentences like this.

Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya?Apakah Anda mau pergi dengan saya?Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh?Apakah saya boleh bertemu dengan Anda nanti siang jam satu?

Let’s now ring a few variations on these sentences. Study the two substitution tables below.

berenangberbicarabekerjabermain tenis

boleh berbelanjaApakah saya bisa berjalan-jalan dengan Anda?

dapat bercakap-cakapbertemubelajarikutmakan

Lesson 38

berenangberbicarabekerjabermain tenis

boleh berbelanjaApakah Anda bisa berjalan-jalan dengan saya?

mau bercakap-cakapdapat bertemu

belajarikutmakan

You can accept invitations like these by echoing the key word in the question: Bisa, Dapat,Mau or Boleh (note that dapat is rarely used in spoken Indonesian). To reject the invitation it isbest to avoid saying tidak mau. This can sound too blunt, even churlish and hostile. It is muchbetter to preface your “no” answer with a polite Maaf and add saya tidak bisa.

Practise generating sentences from the two tables using their words in various combinations.Try to memorise them. Keep saying sentences (imagining situations in which they might bespoken) until you can say them smoothly and unhesitatingly.

Exercise 38-01

Answer each of these invitations in the affirmative (“yes”) using an “echo-answer”, that is,echoing Bisa, Dapat, Mau or Boleh as appropriate. Then go on and answer the follow up ques-tions. Try to introduce as much variation as possible into your answers to the follow-up questions.Study the example first.

Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya? Mau.Hari apa? Hari Sabtu.Jam berapa? Jam setengah delapan malam.Di mana? Hmmmm. Di Restoran Kita di Jalan Hayam Wuruk.

1. Apakah Anda bisa bermain bulu tangkis dengan saya?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................2. Apakah saya boleh belajar dengan Anda?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................3. Apakah Anda bisa berjalan-jalan dengan saya?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................

Lesson 38

4. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................5. Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................6. Apakah saya bisa bertemu dengan Anda?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................7. Apakah saya boleh berbicara dengan Anda?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................8. Apakah saya boleh ikut dengan Anda?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Ke mana? ...........................................................9. Apakah saya bisa ikut berenang dengan Anda?Hari apa? ...........................................................Jam berapa? ...........................................................Di mana? ...........................................................

Asking When?

The questions Hari apa? and Jam berapa? are specific questions and require specific answerssuch as hari Selasa and jam delapan.

A more unspecific interrogative is kapan ‘when?’.Kapan kamu bisa datang? Besok.Kapan Pak Tobing datang dari Jakarta? Hari Sabtu.

But remember that whenever you require a specific answer, it is always better to ask tahun be-rapa?, bulan berapa?, tanggal berapa?, jam berapa?, or hari apa?

You should also be aware that kapan is an interrogative and as such always followed by aquestion mark. It is NOT the same ‘when’ that we use in English in a sentences such as "when Iwas 10 years old...".

Lesson 38

Role Play: Finding a Suitable Day, Hour and Place

With a classmate or with your teacher/tutor imagine that you have run into a friend. The two of you would like to find time to get together but you are both very busy and it is difficult to find a day, hour or place that suits you both. Here is the role play scenario in skeletal form. Your challenge is to follow this scenario putting plenty of conversational flesh on bare bonesgiven below.

• The two acquaintances run into each other. There are greetings and initial smalltalk... perhaps beginning with Anda mau ke mana? or Anda dari mana?

• One speaker issues an invitation e.g. Apakah Anda mau.... or makes a request e.g. Apakahsaya boleh....

• The other speaker asks for more details (Hari apa? Jam berapa? Di mana?) before rejectingthe invitation/request e.g. Maaf, saya tidak bisa... or Maaf, Anda tidak boleh... and giving a reason or excuse e.g. Saya harus pergi ke....

• The first speaker is persistent and asks “What about...” (Bagaimana kalau...) • This too is rejected (politely, of course) with reasons or excuses. • The first speaker continues to be persistent, either asking again Bagaimana kalau... or

issuing a new invitation or request. • Eventually the two friends agree on a suitable day, hour and place. The second speaker

issues a “counter-invitation” or a request of his/her own, and the cycle of the role play begins again with different details, better correctness and smoother fluency.

Potentially, this scenario can be repeated over and over. See how many cycles you can workthrough, building the conversation in each cycle around one of the main verbs we have studied totalk about everyday activities and leisure. Here is a list of most of them.

berenang, berbicara, bekerja, bermain tenis, berbelanja, berjalan-jalan, bercakap-cakap, bertemu, belajar, ikut , makan, minum, berkunjung (ke...), bersembahyang, bersenam

Ucapan: Practice with /h/ between vowels

Listen to Sound File 038-01. When /h/ appears between twovowels it can be clearly audible or scarcely audible at all, dependingon the vowels that flank it.

When /h/ occurs between two vowels that are the same it is breathedand is clearly audible. Practise audibly breathing the /h/ in these words.

mahal mahasiswa pohonbahasa Pak Luhur Bu Solihin

But, if the /h/ occurs between two vowels that are different it is scarcely audible, in fact in thespeech of many Indonesians, especially Javanese, it almost disappears altogether. Practise say-ing these words with a very light /h/ sound.

tahu Suharti tahunlahir latihan melihat

Lesson 38



bagaimana kalau badminton ikut how many hoursberbicara date jam berapa to meetbertemu what if pulang to speakboleh to join in, follow tanggal maybulu tangkis to go home berapa jam what time

Latihan 2—Short Answers

Answer in the affirmative, i.e. say 'yes'.

1. Apakah Anda mau makan dengan saya? ..................................

2. Apakah saya boleh bertemu dengan Anda nanti siang jam satu? ..................................

3. Apakah saya bisa berjalan-jalan dengan Anda? ..................................

4. Apakah Anda masih mau makan dengan saya? ..................................

5. Apakah Anda sudah makan? ..................................

Latihan 3—Hari, Jam dan Tempat

Lengkapi teks berikut dengan memilih kata yang tepat: besok—jam berapa—jam—jauh—ke mana—malam ini—nanti—sekarang

Tigor Apa kabar?

Hotma Kabar baik.

Tigor Kamu mau ____________?

Hotma Tidak ke mana-mana.

Tigor Apakah kamu mau makan dengan saya?

Hotma ____________? Di mana?

Tigor ____________ enam. Kita bisa pergi ke warung dekat rumah saya.

Hotma Maaf, saya tidak bisa karena harus bekerja. Rumah Anda ____________ dari tempat kerja saya.

Tigor Bagaimana kalau kita (“we”) makan ____________?

Hotma Maaf, saya tidak bisa. Saya harus membantu ibu masak.

Lesson 38

Tigor Bagaimana kalau ____________ kita makan pagi?

Hotma Maaf, saya tidak bisa... tapi kamu bisa makan malam dengan keluarga saya ____________.

Tigor Suka sekali! Jam berapa saya bisa datang?

Hotma Kira-kira jam enam.

Tigor Sampai jumpa ____________ malam!

Hotma Sampai jumpa!


Jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan berikut sesuai dengan bacaan.—Refer to the narrative to answer the following questions.

1. Hotma says he is going nowhere. How does he say “nowhere”? ...................................

2. Hotma cannot go to the small restaurant close to Tigor’s house because:A. he has to workB. he doesn’t like the food thereC. he has to studyD. no public transport is available

3. At 18:00 Hotma has to:A. workB. studyC. help his mother cookD. eat dinner with his family

4. Tigor replies to Hotma’s invitation to have dinner tonight saying that he:A. really likes the idea and can comeB. likes the idea but has other commitmentsC. he can only make it at six o’clockD. can’t make it

5. Hotma invites Tigor for dinner at:A. 06:00B. 12:00C. 16:00D. 18:00

6. What phrase do they use for “see you later”? .....................................................

Lesson 38

Latihan 5—Nama Hari


Monday hari Sabtu Friday hari KamisTuesday hari Minggu Saturday hari SelasaWednesday hari Jumat Sunday hari RabuThursday hari Senin


Jodohkan kalimat di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

1. What day is it today? a. Besok hari apa?2. Today is Sunday b. Besok hari Senin.3. What day was it yesterday? c. Hari apa hari ini?4. Yesterday was Saturday d. Hari apa kemarin?5. What day is it tomorrow? e. Hari ini hari Minggu.6. Tomorrow is Monday. f. Kemarin dulu hari apa?7. What day is the day after to-

morrow?g. Kemarin hari Sabtu.

8. What day was the day before yesterday?

h. Lusa hari apa?

Latihan 7—Kuis

1. Kalau hari ini Hari Kamis, kemarin hari apa?A. Hari MingguB. Hari SelasaC. Hari SabtuD. Hari Rabu

2. Kalau hari ini hari Senin, besok hari apa?A. Hari MingguB. Hari SelasaC. Hari SabtuD. Hari Rabu

3. Ada berapa hari dalam satu minggu?A. empat hariB. enam hariC. tujuh hariD. sepuluh hari

Lesson 38

4. Kemarin hari Jumat. Lusa hari apa?A. Hari MingguB. Hari SeninC. Hari SelasaD. Hari Rabu

5. Which word is sometimes used for Sunday instead of “hari Minggu”?A. hari JumatB. AhadC. hari SelasaD. hari Senin


Refer to the calendar to answer the following questions.

1. Tanggal dua puluh satu hari apa?A. hari RabuB. hari SelasaC. hari SeninD. hari Minggu

2. Kalau hari ini tanggal dua belas, besok hariapa?A. hari SelasaB. hari RabuC. hari SabtuD. hari Jumat

3. Hari apa tanggal dua?A. hari KamisB. hari JumatC. hari SabtuD. hari Minggu

4. Apakah tanggal tiga belas hari Selasa atau hari Rabu?A. hari SelasaB. hari Rabu

5. Hari apa tanggal dua puluh lima?A. hari MingguB. hari SeninC. hari SelasaD. hari Rabu

6. Kalau besok tanggal sembilan, hari ini hari apa?A. hari KamisB. hari Jumat

Lesson 38



Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti:

1. “Monday the 7th of May.”Hari—Senin—tujuh—tanggal—Mei.

2. “Friday the 18th of June.”Hari—tanggal—Jumat—belas—delapan—Juni.

3. “If today is Monday, what day is tomorrow?”Kalau—hari—hari—hari—besok—ini—Senin,—apa?

4. “If tomorrow is Wednesday, what day is today?”Kalau—Rabu,—hari—besok—apa—hari—hari—ini?

5. “Do you want to go shopping with me later tonight at seven?”Apakah—nanti—Anda—mau berbelanja—saya—malam—dengan—jam tujuh?

Lesson 38


Mendatar:1. to meet3. to swim4. to study5. Thursday6. Monday7. to work9. Wednesday10. Friday13. Saturday14. Tuesday15. to pray16. to playMenurun:1. to go shopping2. yesterday4. tomorrow7. to speak8. day after tomorrow11. Sunday12. such-and-such a date

Lesson 39

Membeli Tiket Pesawat

Aims

bantu to help lewat more, pastberangkat to depart murah cheapberapa lama how long oh begitu I seeboleh may penuh fulljam berapa what time pesawat terbang airplanekapan when perusahaan companykira-kira approximately saja onlykurang less, before, to (time) setengah a halflalu then, ago seperempat one fourth

Answer the following questions based on your personal experience or information that youheard concerning Indonesian airlines. If you don't know the answer, just guess!

✗ Apakah Anda pernah naik pesawat terbang di Indonesia? Kapan? Di mana?

✗ Penerbangan (airline) apa saja yang ada di Indonesia?✗ Menurut Anda, bagaimana perusahaan penerbangan di Indonesia?✗ Apakah pesawat terbang di Indonesia sudah tua atau masih baru?

Read the following text AFTER you have answered all questions.

39

Lesson 39

More on “lebih” and “yang”

The meaning of lebih is “more, -er (when you are comparing qualities or quantities)”:

lebih besar bigger lebih bagus betterlebih mahal more expensive lebih terkenal more famouslebih tua older lebih keras harder, more solidlebih luas broader lebih sulit more difficult

If you ask a question comparing two persons, you use the interrogative siapa “who”:Siapa lebih tua? Pak Hakim atau Pak Imran?Who is older? Mr. Hakim or Mr. Imran?

and the answer would be:Pak Hakim lebih tua daripada Pak Imran.Mr. Hakim is older than Mr. Imran.

It is quite common to place “yang” after siapa and before an adjective or before lebih + adject-ive:

Siapa yang lebih tua? Pak Hakim atau Pak Imran?Who is (the one that is) older? Mr. Hakim or Mr. Imran?

and the answer would be:Pak Hakim yang lebih tua.Pak Hakim is the older one.

Lesson 39

If you ask a question comparing two things, you use the interrogative yang mana “which (outof a known set)”:

Yang mana lebih mahal? Honda City atau Toyota Corolla?Which one is more expensive? The Honda City or the Toyota Corolla?

and the answer would be:Toyota Corolla lebih mahal daripada Honda City.The Toyota Corolla is more expensive than the Honda City.

It is quite common to add “yang” before the adjective or before lebih + adjective:Yang mana yang lebih mahal? Honda City atau Toyota Corolla?Which one (is the one that) is more expensive? The Honda City or the Toyota Corolla?

and the answer would be:Toyota Corolla lebih mahal .The Toyota Corolla is more expensive.

Yang paling

Superlative phrases are formed by placing noun + yang paling ‘most’ before the adjective:Gedung yang paling tinggiThe tallest building.Tiket yang paling mahal.The most expensive ticket.

Dialogue

Listen to Sound File 039-01 between Ibu Melati and Ibu Ainun (a ticket attendant). Ibu Melati tinggal di Semarang, tetapi adiknya tinggal di Jakarta. Ibu Melati mau naik pesawat

ke Jakarta. Di dekat rumahnya ada agen perjalanan.

IbuAinun

Selamat siang, Bu. Selamat siang.

IbuMelati

Silakan duduk, Bu. Bisa saya bantu? Saya mau ke Jakarta.

Oh begitu. Dari Semarang ke Jakarta, ya?Kapan Ibu mau berangkat?

Hari Sabtu, Bu. Sore. Eh, berapa lama penerbangannya?

Kira-kira satu jam. Berapa harga tiketnya?

Kalau Garuda, lima ratus ribu Rupiah. Apakah ada yang lebih murah?

Ada. Sriwijaya dan Mandala. Yang mana yang paling murah?

Yang paling murah Mandala, tetapi Sabtusudah penuh. Bagaimana kalau Jumat?

Jumat juga boleh. Jam berapa?

Hari Jumat Mandala berangkat jam lima belas lewat empat puluh dengan nomor penerbangan RI 293.

Lalu berapa harganya?

Lesson 39

Tiga ratus tujuh puluh ribu Rupiah. Untuk berapa orang, Bu?

Satu saja. Nama saya Melati.

Baiklah

Now check your understanding of this dialogue by doing Latihan 2 and 3. Always consult agood dictionary or the vocabulary cards whenever you stumble upon difficult words.

Question Word Plus “Saja”

Imagine you have a friend who just returned from Indonesia. Youknow that he went to Indonesia, but you want to know what places hehas visited. When we ask that person “Where did you go to?” the an-swer can be unspecific, such as “I visited many places in Java andSumatra” When we want the answer to be more specific, we can modifythe question slightly: “Where all did you go to?” and then the answer islikely to be more specific: “I went to Jakarta, Bandung and Medan.”

In Indonesian, when we want the answer to contain more than onething we use a question word followed by saja.

Penerbangan apa saja yang ada di Indonesia?What airlines are there in Indonesia?

Here, the answer expected is not only “banyak”, but should be more specific. For instance:Banyak penerbangan ada di Indonesia, ada Merpati, Garuda, Sriwijaya Air, dan banyak lagi.

More examples with question word plus saja:Siapa saja yang datang?Who (all) came?Kamu ke mana saja tadi? What places did you visit today?Apa saja yang kamu beli di pasar?What things did you buy at the market?Buku apa saja yang harus kita baca?What books do we have to read?

In case you noticed that the two last sentences sound a bit unfamiliar, they are of the sametype as Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan? in Lesson 35. What we said there also applies here: Forthe moment, don’t worry about the grammatical rationale for the order of words or the form of theverbs beli (buy) and baca (read). But if you really need to find out now, look at Lesson 46 and 93where Passive Type II is explained.

Lesson 39

Jam Berapa?—Telling the Time in Indonesian

The 24-hour clock is a convention of time keeping in which the dayruns from midnight to midnight and is divided into 24 hours, indicatedby the hours passed since midnight, from 0 to 23. This system is themost commonly used time notation in the world today.

There are only a handful of countries that still use the 12-hour clock,and the only remaining country in the world that uses the 12-hour clockfor official purposes is the USA.

In Indonesia, the time is often followed by a reference to the timezone, i.e. WIB (Waktu Indonesia Barat), WITA (Waktu Indonesia Tengah),and WIT (Waktu Indonesia Timur). Indonesia Western Time (WIB) is sev-en hours in advance (UTC+7) of Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), Indone-sia Central Time (WITA) is eight hours ahead, and Indonesia EasternTime (WIT) is nine hours ahead of GMT.

In formal Indonesian the time is pronounced as Jam ___ lewat ___ menit. In formal Indonesianit is also common to use pukul instead of jam. Note that a dot is typically used as the hour-minuteseparator:

08.25 Jam delapan lewat dua puluh lima menit9.36 Jam sembilan lewat tiga puluh enam menit10.55 Pukul sepuluh lewat lima puluh lima menit16.30 Pukul enam belas lewat tiga puluh menit23.15 Pukul dua puluh tiga lewat lima belas menit

However, in colloquial speech 16:00 is usually re-ferred to as jam empat, or jam empat sore if this is notevident from the context. While 16:30 is jam enam belaslewat tiga puluh menit, in colloquial speech it is renderedas setengah lima. A quarter to and a quarter past are in-dicated by kurang seperempat and lewat seperempat.

The times 20, 25, 35, and 40 minutes after the houruse the 30 minutes (setengah...) as the point of refer-ence:

setengah sembilan kurang limasetengah dua belas lewat sepuluh setengah lima lewat lima

Look at the poster to see how the time is shown inthe proper format. Pkl. is the abbreviated form of pukul: Senin, 22 September 2014, Pkl. 08.30WIB which is Monday, 22 September 2014 at 08.30 a.m.

https://pbs.twimg.com/media/BxzxiLOIMAAUBYP.jpg:large

Lesson 39

Latihan 1—Kosa Kata Lalu 1

Jodohkan kata di kolom sebelah kiri dengan artinya di kolom sebelah kanan.

jam berapa cheap kapan approximatelybantu I see kira-kira to departberangkat less, to (time) kurang what timeboleh a half lalu to helplewat past perusahaan maymurah then, ago setengah a quarteroh begitu when seperempat company


Listen to Sound File 039-01 while answering the following questions.

1. What does Mrs. Melati’s want to do at the travel agency?A. She wants to book a flight to Semarang.B. She wants to enquire about available flights, but she doesn’t want to book.C. She books a flight to Jakarta.

2. Does Ibu Melati know how long the flight is?A. YesB. No

3. The travel agent indicates that the flight takes about an hour. How does she say “about,approximately”? ..............................................................

4. How much does the Garuda ticket costs? (write in digits) ........................................

5. The Mandala flight is cheaper than the Sriwijaya flight.A. CorrectB. False

6. Ibu Melati inquires whether there are cheaper flights. What word or phrase does she use for “cheaper”? .........................................................................

7. Ibu Melati also wants to know what the cheapest flight is. How does she say the cheapest? .........................................................................................

8. What’s wrong with the Mandala flight on Saturday?A. It is too expensive.B. It is too early.C. It takes too long.D. It’s booked out.

Lesson 39

9. So finally she books a flight onA. MondayB. WednesdayC. FridayD. Saturday

10. The final purchase price is...A. 730,000B. 307,000C. 370,000D. 300,700

Latihan 3—Isian

Latihan 4—Bertanya


1. berapa jam? a. which one?2. apakah ada? b. are there?3. berapa lama? c. how much does it cost?4. kapan? d. how many hours?

Lesson 39

5. jam berapa? e. when?6. bagaimana kalau? f. what about?7. berapa? g. how many/much?8. berapa harganya? h. at what time? 9. yang mana? i. how long?



1. Yang paling bagus ini. a. What about Saturday? 2. Kalau ini, bagaimana? b. Can I help you?3. Bagaimana kalau hari Sabtu? c. Which one is the cheapest?4. Yang mana yang paling murah? d. Saturday is fine, too.5. Apakah ada yang lebih murah? e. Is there a cheaper one?6. Hari Sabtu juga boleh. f. This is the best one.7. Bisa saya bantu? g. What about this? How is it?

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda : Angka

Write the number in digits according to the convention used in Indonesia.

1. How do you write the number “tiga ratus lima puluh ribu”?A. 350.000B. 350,000

2. “seratus delapan puluh ribu” (in digits) ..................................................................

3. “lima puluh dua ribu” ..................................................................

4. “empat ribu delapan ratus” ..................................................................

5. “seribu tiga ratus” ..................................................................

6. “lima belas ribu tujuh ratus” ..................................................................

7. “empat ratus enam puluh sembilan ribu” ..................................................................

Latihan 7—Telling the Time in Colloquial Indonesian

Look at the Semarang Airport Flight Schedule (Jadwal Penerbangan) and write the times asthey would be spoken in colloquial Indonesian.

Example:GA 247 berangkat ke Jakarta jam setengah delapan kurang sepuluh

Lesson 39

1. GA244 datang dari Jakarta jamA. delapan belas lewat empat

puluhB. setengah tujuh lewat sepu-

luh

2. GA230 datang dari Jakarta jam................................................................................................

3. GA232 datang dari Jakarta jam................................................................................................

4. GA235 tiba di Jakarta jam................................................

5. TGN 126 berangkat kePangkalanbun jam................................................

6. GA 238 datang dari Jakarta jam................................................................................................

Note: Tiba is synonymous to sampai“arrive”.



1. “Is there a cheaper one?”Apakah—lebih—ada—yang—murah?

2. “Mandala is the cheapest, but Saturday they’re sold out.”Yang—Mandala,—sudah—murah—paling—Sabtu—tetapi—penuh.

3. “How long does the flight take to Yogyakarta?”Berapa—ke—penerbangan—lama—Yogyakarta?

4. “The flight to Palembang is already full on Saturday.”Hari—sudah—Sabtu—Palembang—penerbangan—ke—penuh.

5. “May I ask for the ticket price to Denpasar?”Boleh—ke—harga—saya—tiket—minta—Denpasar?

Jadwal PenerbanganBANDARA AHMAD YANI SEMARANGTelp. Informasi Bandara: (024) 7608735

No. Pnb (Hari) Berangkat Tiba No Pnb (Hari) Datang

GARUDA

Ke Jakarta Dari Jakarta

GA 231 (Setiap hari) 06.00 07.00 GA 230 (Setiap hari) 07.05









KALSTAR TRIGANA AIR

Ke Pangkalanbun Dari Pangkalanbun

TGN126 (Setiap hari)

12.45 14.32 TGN 125 (Setiap hari)

12.02

Lesson 39


Mendatar:2. can, may, it’s

okay3. just, only5. schedule6. hour, clock,

o’clock8. how?10. according to12. price15. flight16. cheapMenurun:1. when?2. how many,

how much?3. late afternoon4. long (of time)7. ticket8. to depart9. full11. but13. to help14. also

Lesson 40

Verbs With The Me- Prefix

Aims

• To introduce and practise some common verbs with the meN- prefix. • To give further practice with sedang.

Vocabulary Review


anjing a dog kemarin yesterday

besok tomorrow keterangan information

burung a bird lakukan to do something

dapur a kitchen masak to cook

dinding an interior wall pakaian clothing

halaman a yard membantu to help

Rambu di Jalan Raya Bahasa

Many words in Indonesian consist of a baseword to which affixes areattached. An affix is a syllable that cannot stand on its own as a free-stand-ing word but is always attached to a “mother-word”, called a baseword.When it is attached to the front end of a baseword it is called a prefix, andwhen attached to the rear end it is called a suffix. A combination of a prefixand suffix that always appears together “straddling” a baseword is called acircumfix. Although it can’t stand on its own, an affix – whether a prefix, suf-

fix or circumfix – usually has a consistent meaning or a consistent grammatical function. We have affixation in English. Take, for example, the word “comfort”. You can regard “comfort”

as a baseword and you can attach the suffix “-able” to it forming the derived word “comfortable”.Or you can attach the prefix “dis-” to the base, producing the word “discomfort”. You can also at-tach a prefix and a suffix to the base at the same time, producing, for example, the word “uncom-fortable”.

Basewords are usually “naked” words without affixes attached to them. In Indonesian base-words usually consist of two syllables, like makan, minum, buah, warna, tinggal, tanya, bantu etc.

40

Lesson 40

A few – mostly foreign borrowings – may consist of three syllables, like pustaka (from Sanskrit)and sekolah (Portuguese) or just one syllable like hak (Arabic). Prefixes and suffixes can be at-tached to these to form derived words, i.e. words that have affixes in them. You have met somederived words already. For example, makan (to eat) gives us makanan (food). Here makan is thebaseword, -an is a suffix, and makanan is the derived word.

Here are a few more examples you have already met in previous lessons.sekolahschool

bersekolahto go to school

tinggalto stay

meninggalto die, to pass away

minumto drink

minumana drink, a beverage

buahfruit

buah-buahana variety of fruits

bertanya (from •tanya)to ask a question

pertanyaana question

membantu (from •bantu)to help

pembantuan assistant, a household servant

These examples show, among other things, that the attachment of an affix can sometimeschange the function of a word: a verb may become a noun (makan becomes makanan), a nounmay become a verb (sekolah becomes bersekolah) or there may be no change in function. Some-times the attachment of an affix can produce a radically different (though usually related) meaning,as you can see in the case of tinggal and meninggal.

The two most common verbal prefixes in Indonesian are ber- and meN-. Verbs with a ber- pre-fix are usually intransitive, that is, they are like the English “he died”. You cannot “die” someoneelse – dying is something done by the “doer” of the action. That’s why the verb is called “intransit-ive” – it doesn’t transmit or inflict its action on to anyone or anything else. An Indonesian verb witha ber- prefix is like this. The action expressed in the verb happens to the doer of the action ex-pressed in the verb, not to anyone or anything else. Take, for example, the sentence Mereka se-dang bersenam (They are doing gymnastics). Here the action of doing gymnastics is being doneby the subject of the verb (mereka) – you cannot “gymnastic” someone else.

The prefix meN- on the other hand usually (but far from always!) signals that the verb it is at-tached to is transitive, that is, the action expressed in the verb is being inflicted on someone orsomething else. Take, for example, the sentence Pak Mitra membuka pintu (Mr Mitra opened thedoor). Here Mr Mitra is inflicting the action of opening on to the door, so the verb is transitive andit takes a meN- prefix.

As the ber- and me- prefixes attach themselves to a baseword, there is often a variation inform of the prefix and/or the front end of the baseword in order to produce a “seamless” newword, i.e. one that is smoothly integrated and easily pronounceable. For example, in the verbbekerja (to work), the base-word is kerja. To facilitate pronunciation, the /r/ is dropped from theber- prefix. You never find *berkerja. Belajar is formed from the baseword ajar with a ber- prefix,but to make the derived form roll more smoothly off the tongue the ber- is modified slightly tobel-.

Lesson 40

Similarly with the me- prefix. The baseword tinggal merges with the me- prefix to produce the“blended” word meninggal. The prefix me- is likewise “glued” to the basewords bantu and bukawith the nasal sound /m/ to produce the transitive verbs membantu and membuka.

This process of modifying the prefix and/or baseword so that they fit together smoothly iscalled assimilation. The prefix meN- “assimilates” to basewords in quite complex ways, depend-ing on the initial sound in each baseword. Because the rules for the assimilation of the meN- pre-fix are complex, we won’t cover them explicitly until Module Five of The Indonesian Way. In themeantime just learn the forms of meN- verbs “as they come”.

It is important to get a feel for the process of affixation in general, and for the distinctionbetween baseword and prefix in particular. One reason why this is important is that the entries inmost dictionaries of the Indonesian language are arranged in alphabetical order of the basewords.This means that if you meet the word bersekolah, for example, and try to look it up in a dictionaryunder “b” you won’t find it. You will have to look it up under “s” for sekolah. Similarly, when youfirst see meninggal (or any of the many thousands of words like it) you can’t immediately see thatthe baseword is tinggal. You won’t find meninggal listed under “m” in most dictionaries, so youneed to know what the base-word is if you are to find it up in a dictionary. (George Quinn’sLearner’s Dictionary of Today’s Indonesian is an exception to this convention. All the main entriesin this dictionary are arranged according to the first letter of each word, irrespective of whether itis a base-word or not.)

Introducing Verbs with the Me- Prefix

In previous lessons you have practised using a number of verbs with the ber- prefix: berasal,berbelanja, berbicara, bercakap-cakap, berdiri, berenang, beristirahat, berjalan, berjalan-jalan, ber-kunjung (ke...), berlari, bermain, bersekolah, bersembahyang, bersenam, bertanya, bertemu, beru-mur..., berwarna..., bekerja and belajar. Check that you remember the meanings of each of them.A few meN- (the capital N denotes the added nasal) prefix verbs have also popped up: melihat (tosee something, to look at something), memanggil (to call out to someone, to summon someone),membantu (to help someone, to assist someone), membuka (to open something), mempunyai (tohave something, to own something). You will notice that they all have an object, that is a personor thing that each verb governs, or impinges on, or “inflicts” itself on.

You will learn more about the prefix meN- later on. For the time being it is sufficient to simplymemorise the most common changes that occur when the prefix meN- is added to a baseword:

meN- becomes me- when the root word begins with l, m, r, ymeN- becomes men- when the root word begins with c, j, d and tmeN- becomes mem- when the root word begins with b, pmeN- becomes meng- when the root word begins with a vowel, h, or g, kmeN- becomes meny- when the root word begins with sNote that initial s as well as the three voiceless plosives p, t, and k are dropped when the pre-

fix meN- is added. (Bases beginning with f, n, q, v, w, x, z, are rare or non-existing, and hence not included)Lets look at some more meN- verbs. Study the examples below.

Ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.Father is reading the newspaper in the living room.

Lesson 40

Johannes mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi.Johannes is washing his clothes in the laundry (bathroom).Kakak mendengarkan radio di kamar tidurnya.Elder sister is listening to the radio in her bedroom.Nia membersihkan dapur.Nia cleaned the kitchen.Magdalena menulis novel.Magdalena is writing a novel.Mereka menonton televisi di ruang keluarga.They are watching television in the living room.Hendro menyapu ruang makan.Hendro sweeps the dining room.

The previous, and also the following sentences, were translated either in present or past tense.But bear in mind that the Indonesian language does not explicitly indicate tense nor plurality, andhence each of the sentences could be translated differently, e.g. Magdalena menulis novel couldalso be translated as “Magdalena writes novels” or “Magdalena is writing a novel”. Study theseexamples:

Kemarin ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.Yesterday, father read the newspaper in the sitting room.Apakah Johannes mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi nanti?Is Johannes going to be washing his clothes in the laundry later today?Tadi kakak mendengarkan radio di kamar tidurnya.[My] (older) sister just listened to the radio in her bedroom.Besok Nia membersihkan dapur.Tomorrow, Nia is going to clean the kitchen.Magdalena menulis novel.Magdalena wrote a novel.Mereka menonton televisi di ruang keluarga kemarin malam.Yesterday night they watched television in the living room.

Sedang apa? /Ngapain?

If you want to ask about what someone is doing right at this mo-ment you can use the phrase sedang apa? which means somethinglike “in the middle of (doing) what?”

Ibu Suratminingsih sedang apa?Ibu Suratminingsih sedang mencuci piring.What is Mrs. Suratminingsih doing?Mrs. Suratminingsih is washing the dishes.

The word sedang is hence similar to the gerund in English. In colloquial Indonesian lagi is commonly used instead of sedang and apa is replaced by

ngapain, resulting in the phrase: Lagi ngapain?

Lesson 40

In colloquial Indonesian, the prefix meN- is usually dropped while the nasalisation is retainedresulting in nulis instead of menulis, mbaca instead of membaca etc. Verbal roots beginning withthe letter c, however, change to ny: mencuci becomes nyuci.

You should also be aware that many speakers of Indonesian, especially from Jakarta, but oftenalso from other places in Java, change the a-sound in final closed syllables to a weak e: datang ishence pronounced dateng, and teman is often pronounced temen. However, this change doesnot occur regularly, and hence it is not necessary for you to learn these words. It is completelysufficient if you are aware that a in final closed syllables often becomes e as you can hear in theexamples below.

Study these examples:FORMAL

Sedang apa?What are you doing right now?Saya sedang menulis surat kepada teman saya.I’m writing a letter to my friend.Sisilia sedang apa sekarang?What’s Sisilia doing at the moment?Dia sedang mencuci piring di belakang.She’s washing dishes out the back.

INFORMALLagi ngapain?What are you doing right now?Aku lagi nulis surat ke temanku.I’m writing a letter to my friend.Sisilia lagi ngapain?What’s Sisilia doing at the moment?Dia lagi nyuci piring di belakang.She’s washing dishes out the back.

Practise making up questions and answers from the substitutional table below. If you can ,make additions of your own to the columns on the right of the verb. Notice that when you ask aquestion that has sedang in it, in the answer you can say sedang followed by a verb, but youdon’t have to repeat the word sedang, and sedang can’t stand on its own in an answer.

1. IbuAyah sedang apa?Matius

Lesson 40

NuningSuratmiFarida sedang apa?HamidAdam

di belakang rumah.piring di dapur.-----------------------------------------------------

Dia (sedang) mencuci pakaian di halaman belakang.-----------------------------------------------------mobil di garasi.

di depan rumah.3.Anak AndaKakak AndaTeman Anda sedang apa?Adik Anda

di kotafilm di bioskop----------------------------------------------------

di rumahDia (sedang) menonton televisi di ruang keluarga

di rumah temannya----------------------------------------------------tenis di universitas

di gedung olahraga

4.Istri AndaSuami Anda sedang apa?Pacar Anda

radio di halaman belakang.Dia (sedang) mendengarkan musik di kebun.

burung-burung di samping rumah.

5.

Lesson 40

Tutu dan FransEndang dan Lina sedang apa?Ayah dan Ibu

halaman depan.garasi.ruang keluarga.

Mereka (sedang) membersihkan dinding dapur.mobil.lemari es.

6.Anda sedang apa?

keterangan tentang keluarga saya.Saya (sedang) menulis buku.

surat kepada pacar saya.

Si Ratna lagi ngapain, sih?

In Lesson 35 you learned the word lakukan ‘to do’ as part of the phrase:Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan... “What do you usually do...?”Instead of sedang apa we can also use the passive verb lakukan/dilakukan:

Ibu Ningsih sedang apa? Apa yang sedang dilakukan Ibu Ningsih?Si Salimin sedang apa? Apa yang sedang dilakukan Salimin?Kamu sedang apa? Apa yang sedang kamu lakukan?

With second person pronouns (kamu, Anda etc) you have to use the passive form lakukan(passive type II), and not the passive type I form dilakukan, but we will explain that later in detail.For the time being it is sufficient that you know that you have the choice of using either a moreformal construction with lakukan or the more relaxed, yet still formal, variant with sedang apa.

However, in more slangy colloquial Indonesian it is far more common to use the Jakarta variantlagi ngapain instead of sedang apa. Lagi is the colloquial variant for sedang, and ngapain is basedon apa with the Jakarta prefix ng- and suffix -in. Ngapain means: “what (is/are) (you/he/she) do-ing?” So, lagi ngapain means “what are you doing right now?”

Ibu Ningsih sedang apa? Ibu Ningsih lagi ngapain? Si Salimin sedang apa? Lagi ngapain Si Salimin?Kamu sedang apa? Lagi ngapain kamu?

Feel free to add sih at the end of the question to give it more pep: Si Salimin lagi ngapain sih?

Lesson 40

Note the particle Si in front of the name Salimin. Si is not part of the name but rather a kind ofarticle that is often attached to names, preferably in colloquial speech and when referring toyounger people. It is actually the same si that distinguishes apa from siapa!

Ucapan: Practice with /h/ before a consonant

You have practised audibly breathing the /h/ sound when it occurs at the end of a word e.g. inwords like sekolah, rumah, murah, putih etc. The /h/ sound is, in fact, always breathed at theend of any syllable, even when that syllable is in the middle of a word and is followed by a con-sonant.

Practise saying the words from below (Sound File 040-01), breathing the /h/ sound. majalahnyamembersihkansesudahnya

Latihan 1—Kata Lalu


anjing dog halaman yard

besok tomorrow keterangan declaration

burung bird masak to cook

dapur kitchen pakaian clothes

dinding (interior) wall kemarin yesterday

Latihan 2—Kata Baru

Jodohkan kata di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan

membaca to wash sth membersihkan to write

mendengarkan to, towards menulis a letter

mencuci to clean sth menonton what are (you) doing?

majalah to read surat kabar plate, dish

kepada magazine surat a newspaper

piring to listen to sth sedang apa? to watch sth

Lesson 40

Latihan 3―Affixation

Basewords are usually “naked” words without affixes attached to them. Match the Indonesianbaseword to the derived words. Check the meaning of the derived words in the key to the exer-cises.

1. sekolah a. pembantu2. tinggal b. pertanyaan3. minum c. minuman4. buah d. meninggal5. tanya e. bersekolah6. bantu f. buah-buahan

Latihan 4―Menjodohkan

Let’s look at some more “me-” verbs. Each sentence here has been translated as if it is hap-pening at the moment. But bear in mind that, in a different context, each of these sentences couldbe referring to a past, or even a future, event.

1. Ayah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.

a. They are watching television in the liv-ing room.

2. Adiknya mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi.

b. Grandma is cleaning the kitchen.

3. Kakakku mendengarkan radio di kamarnya.

c. My mother is writing a novel.

4. Nenek membersihkan dapur. d. Father is reading the newspaper in theliving room.

5. Ibu saya menulis novel. e. Her brother is washing his clothes in the bathroom.

6. Mereka menonton televisi di ruang ke-luarga.

f. My elder sister is listening to the radio in her room.


As the Indonesian language does not know grammatical tense it has to rely on time markers such as besok, kemarin, sudah, akan, nanti, or tadi.

1. Ayah sudah membaca surat kabar di ruang keluarga.

a. Father has read the newspaper in the living room.

2. Adiknya tadi mencuci pakaiannya di kamar mandi.

b. Her brother has just washed his clothes in the bathroom.

3. Kemarin kakakku mendengarkan ra-dio di kamarnya.

c. Later they are going to watch televi-sion in the living room.

Lesson 40

4. Besok nenek membersihkan dapur. d. My mother will be writing a novel.5. Ibu saya akan menulis novel. e. Tomorrow grandma will be cleaning

the kitchen.6. Nanti mereka menonton televisi di ru-

ang keluarga.f. Yesterday my elder sister listened to

the radio in her room.


Match the sentence stems on the left to the ending sentence response on the right. The sentence response will be a continuation of the sentence stems.

For example:Left: Pada hari Sabtu malam biasanya saya menonton film dengan Susi,

On Saturday nights usually I watch films with Susi, Right: ...tetapi tadi malam saya menonton film dengan Giok Nio.

...but last night I watched a film with Giok Nio.

1. Ayah sedang beristirahat di kamar tidur

a. dan adiknya akan mencuci piring.

2. Kadang-kadang Yuni duduk di kebun, b. dan pada sore hari dia bermain tenis dengan temannya.

3. Pada hari Selasa saya mencuci pakaian

c. dan pada hari Kamis saya membersihkan dapur.

4. Anda mau bertemu dengan dia sekarang?

d. dan pada hari Selasa dia menonton pertandingan sepak bola.

5. Saya suka menonton televisi, e. dan ibu bekerja di kebun.6. Wahyudi akan masak nanti malam f. dan pada jam delapan dia pulang.7. Pada hari Jumat Bapak Maimun

bersembahyang di mesjidg. Maaf tidak bisa. Saya harus pergi ke

pasar sekarang.8. Jam lima sore dia pergi ke rumah

temanh. tetapi biasanya dia menulis surat di

ruang makan.9. Pada pagi hari Fitri bersenam di

gedung olahragai. tetapi kadang-kadang dia membaca

surat kabar di ruang keluarga.10. Biasanya Bapak Lopulisa minum kopi

di ruang makan,j. tetapi saya lebih suka mendengarkan

musik di radio.

Lesson 40

Latihan 7―Jawaban Lengkap

Answer the following sentences with complete sentences containing a meN- or meN-...-kan verb with the appropriate object.

1.Ibu Suratminingsih sedang apa? 2.Pak Fernandes sedang apa?

3.Keluarga Latumahina sedang apa? 4.Gerson sedang apa?

5.Bambang sedang apa? 6.Si Hendro sedang apa?

Lesson 40

7.Keluarga Sucipto sedang apa? 8.Ibu Nia dan Ros sedang apa?

9.Orang-orang ini sedang apa? 10. Anda sedang apa?

Latihan 8―Pilihan Ganda

Keluarga Pak Yohanesada pagi hari biasanya keluarga Pak Yohanes duduk di ruang makan. Bapak Yohanesmembaca surat kabar dan Ibu Yohanes memasak nasi goreng untuk sarapan. Ardi men-

dengarkan musik di radio lalu menonton berita di televisi. Delia membantu Ibu Yohanesmemasak nasi goreng. Sesudah makan, Ibu Yohanes mencuci piring. Delia membantu Ardimencuci pakaian. Pak Yohanes berada di halaman belakang. Dia sedang menyapu halamanitu.

P

1. What does Mr. Yohanes’ family do every morning?A. They watch news together on the TV.B. They sit in the dining room.C. They cook fried rice together.D. They talk in the dining room.

Lesson 40

2. What does Mr. Yohanes do in the dining room?A. He is eating fried rice.B. He is reading a newspaper.C. He is cooking fried rice.D. He is helping Mrs. Yohanes cooking fried rice.

3. Is Ardi listening to the news on the radio?A. YesB. No

4. What does Mrs. Yohanes do after breakfast?A. She helps Delia washing the clothes.B. She sweeps the floor.C. She washes the dishes.D. She cleans the kitchen.

5. Where does Mr. Yohanes go after breakfast?A. He goes to his office.B. He goes to his neighbour’s house.C. He goes to a coffee shop.D. He goes to the backyard.

6. Is Mr. Yohanes cleaning the backyard?A. YesB. No

Latihan 9―Prefix Me-Add the prefix Me- to the following bases. Remember that you cannot mechanically add the prefix me- to the base. In many cases you have to add a nasal sound between the prefix andthe base.

1. tulis ..................................................................

2. masak ..................................................................

3. cuci ..................................................................

4. tonton ..................................................................

5. baca ..................................................................

6. bantu ..................................................................

7. sapu ..................................................................

8. dengar ..................................................................

Lesson 40

Latihan 10―Teka Teki Silang (TTS): The Prefix “ber-”

So far we have encountered two verb-forming prefixes, me- and ber-. The main difference is that ber- verbs are always intransitive. They cannot take an object. If you want to say “I visit Bali” you can NOT say “saya berkunjung Bali”. Instead you have to use a preposition: “Saya berkunjung ke Bali”. Now, “Bali” is no longer the grammatical object but has become part of a prepositional phrase.

Mendatar:1. to chat3. to ask a question5. to go to school7. to swim8. ____ coloured9. to play11. to work out12. to speak13. to pray14. to stand15. to originate (from)16. to visit (a place)Menurun:1. to meet2. to go shopping3. to work4. to be such-and-

such an age..6. to go for a stroll7. to rest; to take a

break10. to run

Lesson 40

Latihan 11―Teka Teki Silang (TTS): The Prefix “meN-”

In contrast to ber- verbs, me- verbs are usually transitive meaning that they can take a grammatical object: Ibu mencuci pakaian. Dia membantu saya. Of course you can also use many of the me- verbs without an object. You can say, for instance: “Saya menulis” (I write), but you can also say “Saya menulis surat” (I write a letter).

Mendatar:1. to help someone;

to assist someone5. to write6. to wash8. to call out to

someone; to summon someone

9. to listen10. to have something;

to own somethingMenurun:2. to clean something3. to open something4. to see something;

to look at something

7. to read8. to watch

Lesson 41

Talking at Length

Aims

• To take the first steps towards stringing sentences together into an extended narrative.

• To do a quick check on your progress through a Quick Quiz.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent wordsused in this lesson that have appeared inprevious lessons. Make sure that you re-member their meanings.

berangkat to depart mendengarkan to listendulu first menonton to watchjagung corn piring a platekue a cake pulang to go homelalu then ruang keluarga living roommajalah magazine sarapan breakfastmelihat to see sesudah aftermembaca to read surat kabar newspapermembersihkan to clean something tadi malam last nightmencari to look for tempat a placemencuci to wash uang money

Before and After

You have already met the words belum and sudah. (Review Lesson 22 if you need to refreshyour memory about belum and sudah.) With the prefix se- glued to them they mean respectively“before” and “after”. Study these model sentences.

Sesudah Adri pulang dia menonton televisi.After Adri came home he watched television.

41

Lesson 41

Sebelum berangkat ke kampus Anda harus bersiap-siap dulu!Before leaving for the campus you’ve got to get ready first!Sesudah pulang dari kantor kepala desa Bapak Suwignyo beristirahat.After coming home from the village office, Mr Suwignyo took a rest.

These two words also form the useful phrases sebelum itu (before that) and sesudah itu (afterthat).

Yohannes mencuci piring. Sesudah itu dia membersihkan dapur.Yohannes washed the dishes. After that he cleaned the kitchen.Ratna bersisir, tetapi sebelum itu dia menggosok gigi.Ratna combed her hair, but before that she brushed her teeth.Sesudah makan pagi ia menggosok gigi, tetapi sebelum itu ia mencuci piring.After having breakfast she brushed her teeth, but before that she washed the dishes.Saya akan berbelanja di mal, tetapi sebelum itu saya harus mengambil uang.I’m going to go shopping at the mall, but before that I’ve got to get some money.

Exercise 41-01

In each of the incomplete sentences in this exercise you will find one of these words: sebelum(before), sesudah (after) or pada (on/at/in, followed by an expression of time).

Write a conclusion to each sentence that fits sensibly with sebelum, sesudah or pada. Studythis example first.

Cue sentence: Saya harus mencuci piring sesudah...You write: Saya harus mencuci piring sesudah makan malam.

1. Saya harus membaca buku ini sebelum... 2. Biasanya saya bangun sebelum... 3. Anda harus ke mana sesudah... ? 4. Sesudah makan siang, apakah Anda... ? 5. Biasanya saya berangkat ke kantor kira-kira jam tujuh pagi, tetapi sebelum berangkat saya... 6. Kadang-kadang saya pergi ke gedung olahraga pada... 7. Pada hari Rabu yang lalu mereka pergi ke pesta sesudah mereka... 8. Ada kuliah bahasa Inggris pada hari Senin, tetapi tidak ada pada... 9. Bersiap-siap dulu sebelum...

10. Apakah Anda mau bermain bulu tangkis sebelum atau sesudah... ?

Getting a Narrative Going

You now have most of the basic resources you need to make a simple narrative about whatyou do in the course of a day. Let’s review some of the all-important adverbs and connectors thathelp you stitch a narrative together.

Lesson 41

To talk about what you habitually do you can used these expressions:

biasanyausually

tetapi biasanyabut usually

kadang-kadangsometimes

tetapi kadang-kadangbut sometimes

As we have seen, to help you talkabout what you do on a particular dayor at a particular time, you can usephrases starting with pada meaning“on”, “at”, “in” when you are talkingabout the time when something hap-pens. (Note that when you are talkingrapidly or colloquially, pada is oftendropped in these expressions.)

pada hari Sabtu malamon Saturday night(s)

pada pagi hariin the morning

pada hari Mingguon Sunday(s)

pada siang hariin the (early) afternoon

pada hari Selasa pagion Tuesday morning(s)

pada sore hariin the (late) afternoon

pada jam delapanat eight o’clock

pada malam hariat night

To make the narrative flow smoothly, you should make as much use as possible of connectors:words and phrases that help you link one part of a narrative to the next. Let’s review the connect-ors that have appeared so far.

sebelumbefore

sebelum itubefore that

tetapi sebelum itubut before that

sesudahafter

sesudah ituafter that

tetapi sesudah itubut after that

danand

jugaalso

atauor

Another very common connector is lalu (which made a brief debut in Lesson 27). Lalu is syn-onymous with kemudian. Both mean “then” when you are talking about what comes after a cer-tain event.

Saya bangun, lalu saya mandi.I get up, then I have a bath.Saya makan siang, kemudian saya masuk kuliah.I have lunch, then I go to lectures.

Daily Routine: Memorisation Exercise

Now, let’s get talking. Cover up the middle and right hand columns in the narrativebelow. Read the sentences in the left hand column, saying them out loud, making surethat you understand everything and trying to remember as much of the narrative as youcan. Check this lesson’s vocabulary cards when you see a new word you don’t know. Then cover

Lesson 41

up the left and right columns and read the middle column filling in the empty spaces frommemory. If you can’t remember the word that should go in an empty space take a peek at the lefthand column. When you can correctly read the narrative in the middle column cover up the leftand middle columns and read the right hand column in the same way. After you have memorisedthe narrative, go through it again thinking of how you could vary it so that it reflects your own dailyroutine.

Pada pagi hari biasanya saya bangun pada jam enam.

Pada ____ hari, biasanya saya bangun pada ____ enam.

Pada ____ hari, biasanya ____ ____ pada ____ enam

Sesudah bangun saya mende-ngarkan berita di radio.

Sesudah ____, saya mende-ngarkan berita di ____.

Sesudah ____ saya ____ berita di ____.

Kadang-kadang saya menon-ton televisi atau duduk di ke-bun.

Kadang-kadang saya menon-ton ____ atau duduk di ____.

Kadang-____ saya menonton ____ atau ____ di ____.

Lalu saya makan pagi. Biasa-nya saya makan roti dan buah-buahan, dan saya minum kopi manis.

Lalu saya makan ____. Biasa-nya saya makan roti dan buah-____, dan saya ____ kopi ma-nis.

____ saya makan ____. Biasa-nya saya makan ____ dan buah-____, dan saya ____ kopi ____.

Sesudah makan saya member-sihkan meja dan mencuci pi-ring.

Sesudah ____ saya member-sihkan meja dan mencuci ____.

Sesudah ____ saya ____ meja dan ____ ____.

Sebelum pergi ke kampus, bia-sanya saya membeli surat ka-bar, dan kadang-kadang saya membeli majalah.

Sebelum ____ ke kampus, bia-sanya saya membeli ____ ____,dan kadang-kadang saya membeli ____.

Sebelum ____ ke ____, biasa-nya saya membeli ____ ____, dan kadang-____ saya membe-li ____ .

Sesudah itu saya naik bus ke kampus. Biasanya saya mem-baca surat kabar atau majalah di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya duduk saja melihat orang dan pemandangan.

Sesudah itu saya naik bus ke ____. Biasanya saya membaca surat kabar atau ____ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ saja melihat orang dan pemandangan.

Sesudah itu saya ____ bus ke ____. Biasanya saya ____ surat kabar atau ____ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya ____ saja melihat ____ dan ____.

Di perpustakaan saya mencari tempat yang tenang untuk bel-ajar.

Di ____ saya mencari tempat yang ____ untuk belajar

Di ____ saya mencari tempat yang ____ untuk ____

Pada siang hari, kira-kira jam 12, saya mengambil uang di bank dan membeli makanan.

Pada siang ____, kira-kira jam 12, saya mengambil uang di ____ dan membeli ____.

Pada siang ____, kira-____ jam 12, saya ____ uang di ____ danmembeli ____.

Biasanya saya makan dengan teman-teman, tetapi kadang--kadang saya makan sendiri.

Biasanya saya makan dengan ____-____, tetapi kadang-ka-dang saya ____ sendiri.

Biasanya saya ____ dengan ____-____, tetapi kadang-ka-dang saya ____ ____.

Now listen to Sound File 041-01 and then complete Exercise 06.

Fleshing Out And Fine-Tuning Your Narrative

The narrative below is an example of how you can flesh out an account of daily activ-ities using the words and grammar you have studied so far. Read the narrative carefully,

Lesson 41

checking that you know all the words (especially the new verbs) in it. Note also how sebelum, se-sudah, lalu and kemudian can be used.

iasanya Yakob bangun jam setengah enam pagi. Sesudah bangun dia pergi ke kebun.Dia suka melihat burung-burung di kebun pada pagi hari. Sebelum sarapan dia mandi,

menggosok gigi, berpakaian dan bersisir. Kira-kira jam setengah tujuh dia sarapan. Yakobbiasanya makan nasi goreng, tetapi kadang-kadang dia makan roti dengan telur. Biasanyadia minum kopi, tetapi kadang-kadang dia minum susu. Yakob tinggal dengan ayah, ibudan adik. Mereka juga makan dengan Yakob. Sesudah makan, Yakob mencuci piring danmembersihkan dapur. Sesudah itu dia pergi ke toko di dekat rumahnya. Di sana dia mem-beli surat kabar. Kadang-kadang dia juga membeli makanan untuk siang hari. Lalu diakembali ke rumahnya dan duduk di ruang keluarga. Di sana dia membaca surat kabar. Jamdelapan biasanya Yakob mendengarkan berita di radio. Kemudian dia mengambil buku-bu-kunya dan naik bus ke kampus. Biasanya Yakob berangkat dari rumah kira-kira jam dela-pan lewat seperempat.

B

After having listened to Sound File 041-02, do Latihan 8.

Exercise 41-02

Copying most of the passage above, write a short account of what you usually do every morn-ing. Make changes to the passage where appropriate so that what you write more or less fits thereality of what you yourself do every morning. For example, you will, of course, change Yakob anddia to saya. Most likely you will also change the times of events as well as their order. You willprobably change (or at least modify) some of the events themselves too. You will have to leaveout a few of the sentences in the model passage, and add one or two new ones, but basicallywhat you write will be recognisable as a transformation of the model passage.

Role Play: Reviewing Your Plans for the Day

This is a solo role play. In the morning, as you stand in front of the bathroom mirror, take a fewminutes to look intently into your own eyes and review your plans for the coming day in Indone-sian. If it doesn’t disturb members of your household or fellow asrama inmates you should speakout loud.

Perhaps you might begin: Sesudah mandi saya berpakaian. Lalu saya makan pagi. Saya makan jagung dengan susu, dan saya minum kopi manis. Sesudah itu, saya harus...

Try to be as detailed as possible, but remember, don’t try to say more than your currentvocabulary and command of grammar permit you to say. Although your vocabulary is still relat-ively small, you can surprise yourself with the length and detail of your narrative. Mention timesand places. Mention real people. At every step in your planned schedule, try to add details. Youmight say...

Lalu saya minum kopi dengan Julia. Kemudian saya akan...but it would be much better if you said, for example...

Lesson 41

Kira-kira jam setengah tiga sore, sesudah kuliah bahasa Indonesia, saya bertemu dengan Julia. Kami bercakap-cakap dan minum kopi di kantin mahasiswa. Saya suka sekali makan kue di warung kopi itu. Kopinya juga enak sekali – kopi asli dari pulau Jawa! Saya suka sekali bercakap-cakap dengan Julia. Dia belajar ilmu kimia, saya belajar bahasa Indonesia dan ilmu politik.

Etc. etc. etc. You can also practise this narrative in the the classroom, with a classmate or yourteacher/tutor taking the role of the “mirror”. Your partner – the “mirror” – can put questions toyou, for example questions beginning:

Apakah Anda ... ? Anda ____ dengan siapa? Di mana Anda... ? Jam berapa Anda... ? Berapa lama Anda... ? and many more.

Reviewing the pronunciation of /h/

Let’s sum up the main features of the pronunciation of /h/.• The /h/ sound is audibly breathed when it occurs at the end of a syllable,

even when that syllable is in the middle of a word and followedimmediately by a consonant. It is also audibly breathed when it appearsbetween two vowels that are the same.

• When /h/ appears between two vowels that are different it is only lightly sounded or not audible at all.

Listen to the following words in Sound File 041-03. After each word there is a pause for you torepeat the word.

sesudah latihantambah membersihkanmajalah melihatolahraga Rupiah

In the speech of some Indonesians, especially Javanese, the /h/ at the beginning of a syllablemay disappear, or can be very weak. But in the following examples initial /h/ is audibly pro-nounced:

hari hijau harus

Lesson 41

Latihan 1―Kosa Kata Lalu


berangkat a long time ago berenang moneydulu a newspaper beristirahat what time?jagung a plate; dishes bersenam to preferkue cake besok to restlalu corn, maize hari Jumat to work outmajalah to wash hari Sabtu definitelymelihat magazine jam berapa? to believemembaca place lapangan tomorrowmembersihkan then lebih suka Saturdaymencuci to clean mendengarkan to swimtempat to depart pasti to listenmenonton to watch percaya to go homepiring to read pulang a quartersurat kabar to see seperempat a fielduang Friday tadi malam last night


Jodohkan waktu di kolom kiri dengan artinya di kolom kanan.

17.00 a. jam sebelas siang 11.00 b. jam setengah dua siang

13.30 c. jam setengah sebelas malam

22.30 d. jam lima sore

19.15 e. jam lima kurang lima sore

05.25 f. jam setengah enam kurang lima pagi

16.55 g. jam dua belas lewat sepuluh malam

00.10 h. jam tujuh seperempat malam


As we have seen, to help you talk about what you do on a particular day or at a particular time,you can use phrases starting with pada meaning ‘on’, ‘at’, ‘in’ when you are talking about the time

Lesson 41

when something happens (note that when you are talking rapidly or colloquially, pada is oftendropped in these expressions).

1. pada malam Minggu a. in the (early) afternoon

2. pada hari Minggu b. in the morning

3. pada hari Selasa pagi c. in the (late) afternoon

4. pada jam delapan d. at eight o’clock

5. pada jam dua siang e. on Saturday night(s)

6. pada pagi hari f. on Tuesday morning(s)

7. pada siang hari g. on Sunday(s)

8. pada sore hari h. at night

9. pada malam hari i. at two in the afternoon

Latihan 4―Menjodohkan: Kata Penghubung

Jodohkan kata penghubung di kolom kiri dengan artinya di kolom kanan.

1. sebelum a. after

2. sebelum itu b. after that

3. tetapi sebelum itu c. also

4. sesudah d. and

5. sesudah itu e. before

6. tetapi sesudah itu f. before that

7. dan g. but after that

8. juga h. but before that

9. atau i. or

Latihan 5―Rangkai Kata

Reorder the Indonesian words below to say :

1. “Before leaving for the campus, you’ve got to get ready first!”Sebelum―Anda―kampus―ke―bersiap-siap―berangkat―harus―dulu!

2. “Ratna combed her hair, but before that she brushed her teeth.”Ratna―dia―bersisir,―tetapi―menggosok―itu―sebelum―gigi.

3. “I’m going to go shopping at the mall, but before that I’ve got to get some money.”Saya―sebelum―akan berbelanja―tetapi―saya harus mengambil.―di mal,―itu―uang

Lesson 41

Latihan 6―Isian

Dengarkanlah Rekaman 041-01 lalu lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini.

Pada __________ hari biasanya __________ __________ pada __________ enam. Sesu-

dah __________ saya __________ berita di __________. Kadang-__________ saya menon-

ton __________ atau __________ di __________. __________ saya makan __________. Bia-

sanya saya makan __________ dan buah-__________, dan saya __________ kopi

__________. Sesudah __________ saya __________ meja dan __________ __________. Se-

belum __________ ke __________, biasanya saya membeli __________, dan kadang-

__________ saya membeli __________.

Sesudah itu saya __________ bus ke __________. Biasanya saya __________ surat kabar

atau __________ di bus, tetapi kadang-kadang saya __________ saja melihat __________

dan __________. Di __________ saya mencari tempat yang __________ untuk __________.

Pada siang __________, kira-__________ jam 12, saya __________ uang di __________

dan membeli __________. Biasanya saya __________ dengan __________, tetapi kadang-

kadang saya __________ __________.

Latihan 7―Pemahaman

Bacalah bacaan berikut ini dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini.

Makan Malam Bersamaekarang jam enam sore. Sinta sedang bersiap-siap untuk makan malam dengan keluar-ganya. Sesudah berpakaian, Sinta pergi ke ruang keluarga. Di sana sudah ada ayah, ibu,

dan kakak Sinta karena mereka mau makan di luar.S

Mereka naik mobil ke Restoran Samudra. Mereka tiba di sana jam tujuh malam. Resto-ran Samudra restoran besar dan ramai. Mereka makan makanan Sunda yang enak sekali!

Sesudah makan dan bercakap-cakap di restoran mereka pulang. Jam setengah sepuluhmalam mereka tiba di rumah. Sinta masuk ke kamarnya karena sudah capai lalu dia meng-gosok gigi sebelum tidur.

Lesson 41

1. Sinta ... pada jam 18.00.A. menggosok gigiB. bersiap-siap untuk makan malamC. tiba di Restoran SamudraD. memasak makan malam

2. Sesudah berpakaian Sinta ke mana?A. ke ruang keluarga, lalu keluar untuk makan malamB. ke ruang keluarga untuk bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganyaC. ke kamarnya, menggosok gigi, lalu tidurD. ke kamar mandi untuk menggosok gigi

3. Bagaimana Restoran Samudra?A. tidak besar dan makanannya tidak enakB. besar tetapi makanannya tidak enakC. besar dan makanannya enakD. tidak besar tetapi makanannya enak

4. Jam berapa mereka tiba di rumah?A. 21.00B. 21.30C. 22.00D. 22.30

5. Sesudah pulang dari restoran, Sinta ...A. ke ruang keluarga untuk bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganya.B. ke masuk ke kamarnya.C. ke kamar mandi.D. ke kamarnya untuk membaca buku.

6. Sebelum tidur Sinta ......A. menggosok gigiB. bercakap-cakap dengan keluarganyaC. memasak makan malamD. naik mobil

Latihan 8―Pemahaman

Dengarkanlah Rekaman 041-02 berikut ini dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini.1. Jam berapa Yakob bangun tidur?

A. 04.00B. 05.00C. 06.00D. 06.30

2. Yakob pergi ke kebun sebelum sarapan.A. BenarB. Salah

Lesson 41

3. Yakob sarapan sebelum mandi.A. BenarB. Salah

4. Jam berapa Yakob sarapan?A. 06.00B. 06.30C. 07.00D. 07.30

5. Yakob biasanya makan ayam goreng dan minum teh untuk sarapan.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Yakob tinggal dengan siapa? (more than one answers)A. Ayah dan ibunyaB. kakaknyaC. adiknyaD. neneknya

7. Yakob pergi ke toko sesudah mencuci piring dan membersihkan dapur.A. BenarB. Salah

8. Yakob biasanya membaca surat kabar di ruang tamu.A. BenarB. Salah

9. Jam berapa Yakob mendengarkan radio?A. 07.00B. 07.30C. 08.00D. 08.15

10. Jam berapa Yakob pergi ke kampus?A. 07.00B. 07.30C. 08.00D. 08.15

Lesson 41

Latihan 9―Teka Teki Silang (TTS)

Mendatar:1. before5. a view; a scene6. to look for; to seek10. then (after that)11. to brush (your teeth)12. after (a certain time)13. to get dressedMenurun:2. to go & get something3. news4. to get up7. to comb your hair8. to buy something9. by yourself, alone

Lesson 42

More Practice Building A Narrative

Aims

• To learn how say “in order to...” and talk about “we” and “us”. • To get more practice talking about everyday activities.

Vocabulary Review


(ber)belanja to go shopping macam kind, sortberangkat to leave, depart main to playberes all fine, in order melihat to seeberwarna to have a colour menonton to watchcari to look for, to seek membeli to buyharganya its price, the price membersihkan to cleanHP mobile phone pakaian clotheskemarin yesterday sarapan breakfastkentang potatoe sebelum beforekereta api train sesudah after

“In Order To ........”

In Lesson 24 you met the word untuk meaning “for”, “intended for”. For example:Kamar ini untuk anak-anak.This room is for the children.

Untuk can also come before a verb, in which case it means “in order to” or simply “to”. Notethat the use of untuk in these cases is always optional.

Nanti malam saya ke bioskop untuk menonton film Laskar Pelangi.Tonight I’m going to the cinema (in order) to see the film “The Rainbow Troops”.Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu dengan Bapak Kepala Desa.Yesterday she went to the office (in order) to see the Village Head.

42

Lesson 42

Study this substitution table and practise producing sentences from it. As always, try to putyourself in the picture by imagining situations in which you might use the sentences. Make addi-tions to the columns where you can.

Besok soreBesok pagi Surabaya pakaianNanti sore pasar makananNanti siang saya ke kota untuk membeli majalahNanti malam toko mencari surat kabarBesok mal sepedaBesok malam Jalan PapuaBesok siang

Exercise 42-01

Answer each of the questions in this exercise with a sentence explaining why you did some-thing or why you usually do something or what you intend to do. Use untuk followed by a verb.Don’t forget to mention a place in your sentence. A selection of useful ber- and me- verbs isprovided.

Study these examples first.

Pertanyaan: Hai, Yulius! Mau ke mana nanti malam?Jawaban: Nanti malam saya ke perpustakaan untuk belajar.Pertanyaan: Pada hari Sabtu malam biasanya ada acara apa?Jawaban: Biasanya saya ke warung kopi untuk minum dan bercakap-cakap dengan teman-teman.

Choose from among these verbs:

mencuci, membaca, menonton, menulis, mencari, membeli, membersihkan,mendengarkan, melihat, belajar, bekerja, berjalan-jalan, berbelanja, bermain (tenis, bulu tangkis, sepak bola, ...), berbicara, bercakap-cakap, bertemu, bersenam, bersembahyang

1. Anda pergi ke mana tadi malam? 2. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan pada sore hari? 3. Pada hari Senin biasanya ada acara apa? 4. Anda sedang apa sekarang? 5. Pada jam setengah enam sore biasanya Anda di mana? 6. Teman Anda sedang apa sekarang? 7. Apa yang Anda lakukan kemarin siang sesudah makan? 8. Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan pada hari Rabu sebelum pergi dari rumah? 9. Pada hari Minggu pagi Anda ke mana?

10. Frans sedang apa?

Lesson 42

We (kami / kita)

“We” is a small word and it can sometimes be a small problem for English speaking studentsof Indonesian. The problem is that there are two words for “we” in Indonesian: kami and kita.Kami means “we” but excludes the person or persons you are talking to. It could be translated“we (but not you)”. Depending on where it appears in a clause it might also mean “us (but notyou)”. Kita, on the other hand, includes the person or persons you are talking to. It could betranslated “we (and that means you too)”. Again, depending on where it appears in a clause itmight also mean “us (and that includes you too)”.

Study these two pictures. Observe how kita and kami are used where in English we use justone word: “we”.

KITAKita ke mana sekarang? Ke bioskop? Ke toko musik? Ayo, ke mana kita?

Where shall we go now? To the cinema? To the music shop? Come on, where are we off to?

KAMIKami mau menonton film. Mau ikut?

We are off to see a movie. Would you like to come?

Bacaan—Reading

Listen to Sound File 042-01 and pay special attention to how kami and kita areused. Notice also that in the direct-speech parts of the narrative the speakers dropinto a more colloquial style of Indonesian, using aku, kamu, ketemu, beres, gitu, sih,tapi, gimana and other informal words or short forms that friends might use when talking among themselves.

Jalan-jalan dengan Temanemarin pagi, saya, Hetty dan Piet pergi ke kota. Kami ingin berbelanja dan menontonfilm. Sesudah makan dan membersihkan rumah kami berangkat naik bemo kira-kira

jam setengah sepuluh. Kami sampai di kota jam sepuluh dan masuk Toko Matahari untukmembeli pakaian. Saya ingin membeli baju baru. Hetty juga mencari baju baru. Kami men-coba beberapa macam baju. Saya membeli baju berwarna putih. Harganya seratus delapanpuluh lima ribu rupiah. Hetty membeli baju berwarna merah yang cukup mahal. Harganya

K

Lesson 42

dua ratus sembilan puluh empat ribu lima ratus rupiah. Sesudah itu kami minum kopi diwarung. Tetapi kami tidak jadi minum kopi karena kopinya tidak enak. Jadi kami minumteh saja.“Sekarang ke mana kita?” tanya Piet.“Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan sesudah itu kita nonton film,” kata Hetty.“Beres,” kata Piet. “Tapi kalau kita nonton film nanti siang, kita nggak bisa pulang sebelumjam lima sore.”“Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?” tanya Hetty.“Aku harus ketemu sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. Kami mau main bulu tangkis.”“Kalau gitu,” kata Hetty, “habis minum kamu pulang saja, Piet. Kami masih akan belanjalagi.”“Baiklah,” jawab Piet. “Kita ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.”Sesudah kami keluar dari warung, Piet pulang naik taksi. Saya dan Hetty ke toko buku.Kami suka sekali membaca majalah dan buku. Saya mencari majalah berita Tempo. Hettymencari novel Laskar Pelangi. Kami melihat banyak sekali buku dan majalah, tetapi kamihanya membeli satu majalah dan satu buku.Sesudah itu kami masuk toko alat-alat elektronik. Saya ingin sekali membeli HP baru. Ditoko itu ada bermacam-macam HP yang keren, tetapi harganya cukup mahal.“Gimana kalau kita pergi ke pasar besok untuk cari HP,” kata Hetty. “HP di pasar murahsekali.”Sesudah keluar dari toko alat-alat elektronik kami pergi ke bioskop. Ada film bagus. MelGibson bermain dalam film Braveheart. Kami suka sekali menonton film Mel Gibson. MelGibson orang Australia, tetapi dia bermain dalam film Amerika. “Minum lagi sebelum pulang, yuk” kata Hetty sesudah kami keluar dari bioskop. Kami minum teh manis. Kami juga makan roti dan kue. Sesudah itu kami pulang naik bis.Kami sampai di rumah kira-kira jam setengah enam sore.

Exercise 42-02

Imagine that you are the narrator (the saya) in the story above. Answer these questions aboutwhat you and your two friends did. Write complete sentences in simple but correct formal Indone-sian. Feel free to copy phrases and sentences from the passage but try to introduce some vari-ations of your own into your answers. Don’t forget that Anda in these questions is like the English“you”: it can refer to just one person, but it can also refer to more than one person. In the ques-tions below it refers to the three (or two) of you, so all your answers should have the word kami(i.e. “we, but not you the listener”) in them.

1. Jam berapa Anda pergi dari rumah?

2. Apakah Anda membersihkan rumah sebelum berangkat?

3. Anda pergi ke kota naik apa?

4. Apa yang Anda lakukan sesudah sampai di kota?

5. Di toko alat-alat elektronik Anda mencari apa?

6. Anda menonton film apa?

Lesson 42

7. Apakah Anda minum lagi sesudah menonton?

8. Apakah Anda suka membaca?

9. Anda pulang naik apa?

10. Jam berapa Anda sampai di rumah pada sore hari?

Ago (...yang lalu)

In the previous lesson you met the word lalu where it was used as a connecting word meaningsomething like “then”, i.e. “moving on (to the next thing/event)”.

The basic broad meaning of lalu is “to go by, to pass by, to move on”. The useful phrase yanglalu means literally “what has gone/passed by” but it can be better translated “...ago” or in somecontexts “last...”. Study these examples:

tiga hari yang laluthree days agosepuluh tahun yang laluten years agoDua tahun yang lalu saya ke Roma.Two years ago I went to Rome.

hari Sabtu yang lalulast Saturdayminggu yang lalulast weekHari Minggu yang lalu ada acara apa?What did you do last Sunday?

Exercise 42-03

Write a narrative giving an account of what Hendro did last Wednesday. Your account shouldmention activities and times, and these should square with the pictures and the times on clocks.To connect the pieces of your narrative, copy the connecting phrases given above the pictures.Apart from following these instructions, you can (and should) introduce your own variations.

Hari Rabu yang lalu Hendro … Sesudah itu, ia keluar untuk …

Lalu Hendro ... Dia masuk rumah lagi untuk ...

Lesson 42

Sesudah itu dia ... Lalu dia ...

Kira-kira jam .... dia sarapan dengan... Sesudah makan dia...

Lalu dia .... Lalu Hendro …

Lesson 42

Pada jam .... dia …

Exercise 42-04

Ask Hendro some questions about what he did last Wednesday morning. The beginning ofeach question is given.

1. Hendro, jam berapa kamu ... 2. Apakah kamu ... 3. Apa yang kamu lakukan ... 4. Apakah kamu ... sebelum atau sesudah ... 5. Jam berapa kamu ... 6. Sesudah ..., apakah kamu ... 7. ... ada kegiatan apa? 8. Jam berapa kamu ... 9. Hendro, saya mau bertanya, apakah kamu ...

10. Sebelum ..., apakah kamu ...

Role Play: Kami Berkunjung ke...

Imagine that a few days ago you visited a certain place, perhaps in company with a friend, hus-band/wife or a member of your family, or perhaps with a work colleague (Bapak Bupati, Ibu Guru,Bapak Kepala Desa, Ibu Dosen). Having returned from the visit you report to another friend or toanother member of your family, or a work colleague (played by another member of the class or byyour teacher/tutor) on what you did while you were away. As you speak you will have to use thepronoun kami (we, but not including the person you are talking to). You should also mention theday of the week and the hour of the day that you did certain things. You should express yourjudgement about the place(s) that you visited, and give reasons for your likes and dislikes.

Your narrative should make as much use as possible of:• ... yang lalu e.g. minggu yang lalu, hari Jumat yang lalu • kami e.g. kami pergi ke sana naik kereta api • berkunjung ke e.g. kami berkunjung ke Taman Kota • days of the week e.g. (pada) hari Minggu kami beristirahat • hours of the day e.g. jam setengah delapan pagi kami berangkat dari hotel

Lesson 42

• daily routine e.g. kami bangun, mandi dan makan pagi • connector words e.g. lalu, kemudian, sesudah itu • preferences e.g. suka, tidak suka, tetapi kami lebih suka...

Perhaps your narrative report might begin something like this (you can substitute other wordsfor the underlined ones):

Minggu yang lalu saya dan teman saya berkunjung ke Sydney. Kami naik kereta api ke Sydney dan kami tinggal di hotel kecil di pusat kota. Kami ingin menonton pertandingan sepak bola. Pada hari Sabtu kami ke lapangan olahraga untuk menonton pertandingan. Kemudian, kira-kira jam enam sore, kami makan di rumah makan. Aduh, makanannya en ak sekali, dan juga murah! Ada ayam goreng dan kentang. Tetapi tidak ada nasi. Sesudah makan, pada jam tujuh malam, kami pergi ke...

As always, don’t try to say more than your current Indonesian vocabulary permits you to say.This may mean that your narrative lacks detail – that you cannot say all that you want to say – butfor the moment you should concentrate on developing fluency within the constraints of the vocab-ulary and grammar you have already mastered. Make this vocabulary and grammar work veryhard to express what you want to say as closely as possible (but probably not as perfectly as youwould like).

Your partner should interrupt frequently, perhaps beginning each interruption with Permisi (Ex-cuse me), and asking questions like those back in Exercise 42-04.

Repeat the role play several times swapping roles with your partner and striving for more vari-ation, better correctness and smoother fluency with each repetition.



berangkat ...in colour main a competitionberes a sort; a kind melihat clothesberwarna all okay menonton to buy sthharga mobile phone membeli to clean sthHP (“ha-pe”) potato membersihkan to play (coll)kemarin price mencari to seekentang to depart, leave pakaian to seekkereta api train pertandingan to watch sthmacam yesterday

Latihan 2—Ago (...yang lalu)


1. tiga hari yang lalu a. last Saturday2. sepuluh tahun yang lalu b. last Sunday

Lesson 42

3. tiga bulan yang lalu c. last week4. hari Sabtu yang lalu d. ten years ago5. minggu yang lalu e. three days ago6. hari Minggu yang lalu f. three months ago

Latihan 3—Sentences with untuk

Listen to Sound File 042-02 carefully and choose the correct response.

1. a. Hari Sabtu biasanya saya ke toko untuk membeli pakaian.2. b. Kamar ini untuk anak-anak.3. c. Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu Bapak Kepala Desa.4. d. Kemarin saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar.5. e. Nanti sore saya mau ke toko buku untuk membeli surat kabar un-

tuk ayah saya.6. f. Saya ke bioskop nanti malam untuk menonton film Ayat-Ayat

Cinta.7. g. Saya mau ke pasar besok pagi untuk membeli makanan.

Latihan 4—Untuk

Read each sentence. Decide which definition of untuk is being used in the sentence’s context: “for” or “in order to”.

1. Kamar ini untuk anak-anak.A. forB. in order to

2. Nanti malam saya ke bioskop untuk menonton film Ayat-Ayat Cinta.A. forB. in order to

3. Kemarin dia ke kantor untuk bertemu dengan Bapak Kepala Desa.A. forB. in order to

4. Besok sore saya ke pasar untuk membeli majalah untuk kakak saya.A. forB. in order to

5. Besok sore saya ke pasar untuk membeli majalah untuk kakak saya.A. forB. in order to

Lesson 42



1. “What time did you depart from home?”Jam—dari—berapa—Anda—berangkat—rumah?

2. “Did you clean the house before you departed?”Apakah—rumah—Anda—membersihkan—sebelum—berangkat?

3. “How did you go downtown?”Anda—pergi—naik—kota—ke—apa?

4. “What are you looking for at the electronic shop?”Di—mencari—Anda—alat-alat—toko—elektronik—apa?

5. “What time did you arrive at home in the late afternoon?”Anda—sampai—berapa—sore—rumah—Jam—di—pada—hari?

Latihan 6—Menjodohkan: Kosa Kata


1. alat a. we (inclusive) 2. cari b. week

3. baju c. we (excl.) 4. yang lalu d. (in order) to

5. mencoba e. arrive in/at 6. untuk f. stylish; cool

7. minggu g. watch (coll.) 8. kita h. look for

9. nonton i. device; tool 10. kami j. shirt

11. sampai di k. try 12. keren l. ...ago; last


Bacalah bacaan “Jalan-Jalan dengan Teman” dan jawablah pertanyaan di bawah ini.

1. What did the three do before going to town?A. They shoppedB. They watched a filmC. They cleaned the houseD. They went to church

2. Why did they go to town?A. to go shopping and eating outB. to see a movie and eating outC. to go shopping and see a movieD. just to see a movie

Lesson 42

3. How did they go to town?A. by a three-wheeled minibusB. by carC. by busD. by motorcycle

4. The narrator bought a white t-shirt in a store. How much did it cost?A. Rp. 158,000.00B. Rp. 185,000.00C. Rp. 815,000.00D. Rp. 518.000.00

5. Which one is more expensive, the narrator’s shirt or Hetty’s?A. The narrator’sB. Hetty’sC. Their shirts cost the same

6. Where did Piet go after drinking tea?A. to the electronic storeB. go homeC. to the cinemaD. to the book store

7. Where did the narrator and Hetty go after drinking tea?A. to the electronic storeB. go homeC. to the cinemaD. to the book store

8. The narrator didn’t buy the mobile phone he was looking for. Why not?A. because he did not have any money at allB. because he didn’t like the mobile phoneC. because the mobile phones in the shop were too expensiveD. because the specification of the mobile phone was not as expected

9. Who watched a movie before going home?A. The narrator and HettyB. Only the narratorC. All of them (the writer, Hetty, and Piet)D. Only Hetty

10. What time did they arrive at home?A. at 17:30B. around 17:30C. before 17:30D. after 17:30

Lesson 42

Latihan 8—Isian

Dengarkanlah rekaman dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini.—Listen to Sound File042-03 to fill in the blanks.

Kemarin __________, saya, Hetty dan Piet pergi ke __________. Kami ingin berbelanja

dan __________ film. Sesudah makan dan __________ rumah kami berangkat naik bemo __________ jam setengah sepuluh. Kami sampai di kota jam sepuluh dan masuk Toko

Matahari untuk membeli pakaian. Saya ingin __________ baju baru. Hetty juga __________ baju baru. Kami __________ beberapa macam baju. Saya membeli baju ber-

warna putih. __________ seratus delapan puluh lima ribu rupiah. Hetty membeli baju ber-warna __________ yang cukup mahal. Harganya dua ratus sembilan puluh empat ribu

lima ratus rupiah. Sesudah itu kami minum kopi di warung. Tetapi kami tidak jadi minum kopi __________ kopinya tidak enak. Jadi kami minum teh saja.

Latihan 9—Menjodohkan: Informal & Formal

Match the informal items with formal items.

1. nggak a. bagaimana 2. belanja b. begitu

3. nonton c. berbelanja 4. cari d. bermain

5. main e. bertemu 6. ketemu f. sesudah

7. gimana g. menonton 8. habis h. mencari

9. gitu i. tidak

Latihan 10—Isian: Kita vs. Kami

Review the conversation below. Remember that kita is the ‘we’ form that includes the person or persons you are talking to whereas kami is the ‘we’ form that excludes the person or persons you are talking to. Fill in each blank with the correct form of ‘we’: kita or kami.

‘Sekarang ke mana kita?’ tanya Piet.

‘Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan sesudah itu kita nonton film,’ kata Hetty.

‘Beres,’ kata Piet. ‘Tapi kalau ________ nonton film nanti siang, ________ nggak bisa pu-

lang sebelum jam lima sore.’

‘Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?’ tanya Hetty.

‘Aku harus ketemu sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. ________ mau main bulu tangkis.’

Lesson 42

‘Kalau gitu,’ kata Hetty, ‘habis minum kamu pulang saja, Piet. ________ masih akan be-

lanja lagi.’

‘Bagus,’ jawab Piet. ‘________ ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.’

Latihan 11—Isian: Informal vs Formal

Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words.

‘Sekarang ke mana kita?’ tanya Piet.

‘Ke toko buku dan toko alat-alat elektronik, dan (1) habis itu kita (2) nonton film,’ kata Hetty.

(3) ‘Beres,’ kata Piet. ‘Tapi kalau kita nonton film nanti siang, kita (4) nggak bisa pulang

sebelum jam lima sore.’

‘Nanti sore ada acara apa sih?’ tanya Hetty.

(5) ‘Aku harus (6) ketemu (7) sama Pak Benyamin jam empat. Kami mau (8) main bulu

tangkis.’

‘Kalau (9) gitu,’ kata Hetty, (10) ‘habis minum (11) kamu pulang saja, Piet. Kami masih akan

(12) belanja lagi.’

‘Bagus,’ jawab Piet. ‘Kita (13) ketemu lagi nanti malam di rumah.’

[...]

(14) ‘Gimana kalau kita pergi ke pasar besok untuk (15) cari HP,’ kata Hetty. ‘HP di pasar

murah sekali.’

Latihan 12—Me- Verbs

Match the following meN- verbs with their translations. Note that all of these verbs aretransitive. This means that they can take an object—in the translation indicated with ‘something’.Some of the following verbs do not necessarily take an object. You can say, for instance, “Ibusedang mencuci” (Mother is doing the laundry”). But at least they can take an object: “Ibumencuci baju saya” (Mother washes my shirt). Other meN- verbs, especially those with the suffix-kan, must take an object. You can not say: *“Ibu membeli” if you want to say that mother isshopping! You can also not say *”Ibu membersihkan” when you want to say that mother does thecleaning. You can only use these verbs transitively: “Ibu membeli roti” (Mother buys bread), “Ibumembersihkan dapur” (Mother cleans the kitchen). Transitive verbs can be distinguished fromintransitive verbs in that they can take an object, and that they can be converted into passivevoice (the kitchen was cleaned by mother).

1. melihat a. to wash (something) 2. membaca b. to read (something)3. membeli c. to watch (something)

Lesson 42

4. membersihkan d. to write (something)5. mencari e. to search; to look for (something)6. mencuci f. to see; to look at (something)7. mendengarkan g. to clean something8. menonton h. to open something9. menulis i. to buy something

10. membuka j. to listen to something

Latihan 13—Ber- Verbs

Ber- verbs are intransitive. They can never take an object. A limited number of ber- verbs, how-ever, can take a complement: “Saya bermain tenis”, “Dia belajar bahasa Indonesia”. As ber- verbsare intransitive, they cannot be converted into passive voice. To learn more about complementsof intransitive verbs, see Sneddon's grammar 3.62-3.64.

1. belajar a. to ask a question2. bekerja b. to be such-and-such an age..3. berjalan-jalan c. to chat4. berbelanja d. to do gymnastics; to work out5. bermain e. to go for a walk/stroll6. bercakap-cakap f. to go shopping7. bertemu g. to meet8. bersenam h. to play9. bersembahyang i. to take a break, relax

10. bertanya j. to stand, stand up11. berumur k. to study, learn12. berenang l. to swim, to go swimming13. berbicara m. to talk14. berdiri n. to work15. beristirahat o. to pray

Lesson 42

Latihan 14—Teka Teki Silang (TTS)Mendatar:3. to try to do

something4. price6. to go shopping (coll)7. to go through,

happen, so therefore, thus

8. we (inclusive)11. to want (to...)12. to watch something13. to look for; to seek14. for; in order to16. electronic18. all okay; no worries19. to watch sth (coll)20. to look for sth (coll)Menurun:1. clothes; clothing2. after (coll)3. to see; to look at5. device; tool9. a week10. to leave15. stylish; trendy17. we (exclusive))18. shirt

Lesson 43

Asking Why

Aims

• To practise asking and answering mengapa and kenapa (why) questions. • To practise using dulu and tadi.

Vocabulary review


bangun to wake up mengambil to fetch something

dosen lecturer sampai until

kalo colloquial for kalau sembahyang to pray

kotor dirty sulit difficult

melihat to see, to look at tua old

mencari to look for terkenal famous

Asking “Why?” and Answering “Because”...

Listen to Sound File 043-01. You may read the transcription and the translation ifthis helps you to understand the dialogue better.

Eka

Besok pagi saya akan bangun jam enam.

Tomorrow morning I’m going to getup at six o’clock.

Dian

Mengapa? Why?

Karena ada kuliah jam delapan. Because there’s a lecture at eight o’clock.

Jam delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda harus kuliah jam delapan pagi?

Eight o’clock? That’s very early! Why do you go to lectures at 8 o’clock in the morning?

Karena Ibu Dosen lebih suka memberikan kuliah pagi-pagi.

Because our lecturer (“Madam Lecturer”) prefers to give lectures early in the morning.

43

Lesson 43

Mengapa (why) and karena (because) go together. Questions with mengapa in them usually de-mand an answer with karena. You can also use mengapa in conjunction with tidak, like the English“why not?” and “why don’t you ...?” Study these examples.

Saya minta teh.I’ll have tea, thanks.

Mengapa Anda tidak minum kopi?Why don’t you have coffee?

Karena saya tidak suka kopi.Because I don’t like coffee

Mengapa tidak?Why not?

Karena, kalau saya minum kopi, saya tidak bisa tidur.Because if I drink coffee I can’t sleep.

Exercise 43-01

Answer the following questions with a complete sentence. Use your imagination: don’t answerSaya tidak tahu. Each of your answers should have karena in it somewhere. If you get stuck youmay find some of the following verbs and verbal phrases useful in writing your answers.

harus, ingin, ingin sekali, tidak dapat, tidak bisa, tidak boleh, mau, tidak mau, suka, sukasekali, tidak suka, ada, tidak ada, tidak punya

1. Kenapa Anda bangun jam setengah lima pagi? 2. Kenapa Anda tidak suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari? 3. Mengapa biasanya Anda mendengarkan radio pada pagi hari? 4. Mengapa Anda tidak makan tadi pagi? 5. Mengapa Anda pergi ke kampus naik taksi? 6. Mengapa Gatot tidak mau menonton film dengan kita? 7. Mengapa Anda tidak bermain tenis tadi siang? 8. Mengapa Anda membeli baju itu? 9. Kenapa Anda belajar di Universitas Gadjah Mada?

10. Kenapa Anda tidak suka tinggal di New York?

Exercise 43-02

Imagine that you have made a negative judgement about something. Justify your opinion witha sentence beginning with karena, and containing the word or phrase given in brackets. Study theexample first.

Makanan di restoran Padaran Luhur tidak enak!Tidak enak? Kenapa?[tidak ada] Karena di restoran Padaran Luhur tidak ada ayam goreng.

Lesson 43

1. Saya tidak suka berkunjung ke kota Surabaya.Mengapa? Surabaya indah sekali![tidak ada] Karena ..............................................................................

2. Kasman bukan teman yang baik.Hah!? Kenapa?[tidak mau] Karena ..............................................................................

3. Saya tidak mau kuliah di Universitas Widya Buana.Mengapa? Universitas Widya Buana terkenal.[tidak banyak] Karena ..............................................................................

4. Saya tidak suka makan kue coklat.Aduh! Kenapa?[manis sekali] Karena ..............................................................................

5. Saya kira Melbourne bukan kota yang indah.Mengapa?[tidak banyak] Karena ..............................................................................

Dulu and Tadi

Dulu and tadi are two useful words that help you talk more precisely about the sequence ofevents in time. Neither word has an exact one-on-one equivalent in English so to master them youwill have to observe them carefully and remember how they are used. They are both very com-mon words, so you will come across plenty of examples to help you get a feel for what they meanand how they are used.

As you learned in Lesson 29, dulu can mean “first” referring to something done before some-thing else happens, or before you do something else. When dulu is used in this sense it followsthe verb in a clause, or it follows a noun or adverb.

Saya mau mandi dulu.I’d like to take a bath first (before doing anything else)

Dulu can also mean something like “for the time being”, or “for the moment”.Saya mau tinggal di sini dulu.I want to stay here for the moment.Duduk dulu.Take a seat for the time being.Dulu also means something like “in former times”, “a long time ago” and also “used to”. When it is used in this sense it usually comes at the beginning of a clause.Dulu saya tinggal di Surabaya.I used to live in Surabaya (a long time ago).Dulu ada bioskop di sini, sekarang tidak ada!Formerly there was a cinema here, now there isn’t!

Tadi means something like “earlier today”, “a short time ago”, “just now”.

Lesson 43

Tadi saya melihat Ibu Simandjuntak di pasar.I saw Mrs Simandjuntak at the market earlier today.Ke mana tadi?Where did you get to just now?

Tadi is also very often used in phrases that refer to the immediate past periods or divisions ofthe current day (including the evening of the previous day, i.e. tadi malam ‘last night’), when youare “looking back” to earlier parts of the day.

Tadi siangThis (late morning and early) afternoonTadi malamLast night, yesterday night

Cara Indonesia: A New Day Begins at Sundown

Interestingly, the phrase tadi malam, which is usually translated “last night” or“yesterday night”, actually refers to an earlier part of the current day, like tadi siangand tadi pagi. The reason for this is that traditionally Indonesians perceived a newday as beginning at sunset, not sunrise as we usually do. For Indonesians informer times (and to a large extent still today), a new “day” began with malam, andcontinued with pagi, siang and sore. So in the context of Indonesian culture it isperfectly logical to say tadi malam as if yesterday night were a previous part of thecurrent day.

Ari in Conversation with Ibu Gah at her Boarding House

Listen to Sound File 043-02 – a conversation between Ibu Gah, the landlady at a stu-dent boarding house (rumah kos), and Ari, one of her student lodgers. Listen to SoundFile and read the transcription until you have memorised the dialogue. Without looking atthe transcription, try to say the Indonesian text out loud making sure that you understandeverything and trying to remember as much of the narrative as you can. Keep practising until youcan say the Indonesian without error. Check this lesson’s vocabulary cards when you see a newword you don’t know. Observe (among other things) how dulu and tadi are used, as well asmengapa and karena. Notice too that Ibu Gah “speaks down” to Ari using the second-person pro-noun kamu, but Ari “speaks up” to Ibu Gah, addressing her with the more formal and respectfulIbu (shortened to Bu in the vocative).

ARI BU GAHSelamat pagi, Bu. Sudah bangun, ya? Sudah, Ari. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi

sebelum kamu. Biasanya saya bangun jam lima.Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu ba-ngun pagi-pagi?

Karena saya sembahyang dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan.

O begitu. Ibu suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Lesson 43

Apakah banyak burung di taman? Banyak dan bermacam-macam. Ramai sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, tadi malam kamu pergi ke mana?

Saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di kamar. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua be-las.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai tengah malam?

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum, Bu. Hukum cukup sulit.

Sulit? Mengapa?

Karena kami harus membaca banyak buku. Juga kami harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Mengapa?

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indo-nesia, dan mereka membuat undang-undang. Kami harus tahu tentang undang-undang itu.

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, seperti biasa. Baik. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ari?Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi pada pagi hari.

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau membantu saya? Halaman rumah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti siang saja, ki-ra-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau mandi dan ma-kan dulu.

Baik. Terima kasih banyak, Ari.

After having listened to the sound file and read the transcription, do the memorization exercisefor vocabulary practice below.

Read the dialogue out loud several times until the words come smoothly off your tongue in arelaxed, idiomatic way. Then cover up the left and right columns and read the middle columnfilling in the empty spaces from memory. If you can’t remember the word that should go in anempty space take a peek at the left hand column. When you can correctly read the narrative in themiddle column cover up the left and middle columns and read the right hand column in the sameway.

Selamat pagi, Bu. Sudah ba-ngun, ya?

Selamat _____, Bu. Sudah bangun, ya?

Selamat _____, Bu. Sudah ______, ya?

Sudah, Ari. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi sebelum kamu. Biasanya saya bangunjam lima.

Sudah, Ari. Sudah ____. Sayabangun tadi sebelum ____. Biasanya saya _____ jam lima.

Sudah, Ari. Sudah ____. Saya______ tadi sebelum ____. Bi-asanya saya _____ jam ____.

Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu bangun pa-gi-pagi?

Aduh, pagi-pagi sekali, Bu. Mengapa Ibu _____ pagi-pa-gi?

Aduh, pagi-_____ sekali, Bu. _______ Ibu _____ pagi-pagi?

Karena saya sembahyang dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan.

Karena saya _______ dulu, lalu saya keluar untuk berja-lan-______.

Karena saya _______ dulu, lalu saya _______ untuk ber-jalan-______.

O begitu. Ibu suka ber-jalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

O _____. Ibu suka ber-jalan-jalan pada pagi _____?

O _____. Ibu _______ ber-jalan-jalan pada pagi _____?

Lesson 43

Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

____ sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di ___ untuk mendengarkan bu-rung-______.

____ sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling ______. Saya suka duduk-duduk di ___ untuk _______ burung-______.

Apakah banyak burung di ta-man?

Apakah banyak burung di _____?

Apakah banyak _______ di _____?

Banyak dan bermacam-ma-cam. Ramai sekali mereka. Oya, Ari, tadi malam kamu per-gi ke mana?

Banyak dan bermacam-_____. Ramai sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, ____ malam kamu pergi ke mana?

Banyak dan bermacam-_____. ______ sekali mereka. O ya, Ari, ____ malam kamu pergi ke _______?

Saya pergi ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di ka-mar. Tadi malam saya belajarsampai jam dua belas.

Saya ____ ke perpustakaan untuk belajar, Bu. Lalu, saya pulang dan belajar lagi di ka-mar. Tadi _____ saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Saya ____ ke perpustakaan untuk ______, Bu. Lalu, saya ______ dan belajar lagi di ka-mar. Tadi _____ saya belajar sampai jam dua belas.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua be-las? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai tengah malam?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua be-las? Kenapa kamu ______ sampai tengah malam?

Aduh! _______ jam dua be-las? Kenapa kamu ______ sampai tengah ________?

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum, Bu. Hu-kum cukup sulit.

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah ______, Bu. Hu-kum cukup sulit.

Karena saya ________ mata kuliah ______, Bu. Hukum cukup ________.

Sulit? Mengapa? Sulit? Mengapa? Sulit? ________?

Karena kami harus membacabanyak buku. Juga kami ha-rus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Karena kami harus _______ banyak buku. Juga kami ha-rus _____ bahasa Belanda.

________ kami harus _______banyak buku. Juga kami ha-rus _____ bahasa _________.

Harus belajar bahasa Belan-da? Mengapa?

Harus belajar bahasa Belan-da? ________?

Harus belajar bahasa ________? ________?

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka membuat undang--undang. Kami harus tahu tentang undang-undang itu.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di _______, dan mereka membuat undang--undang. Kami harus _____ tentang undang-undang itu.

Karena ____ orang Belanda berkuasa di _______, dan mereka _______ undang-un-dang. Kami harus _____ ten-tang undang-undang itu.

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke dapur se-karang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

O begitu. Permisi dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke ______ se-karang _____ masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

O begitu. _______ dulu, ya Ari. Saya mau ke ______ se-karang _____ masak. Kamu mau _______ apa?

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, seperti biasa.

Nasi putih dan ikan saja, Bu, seperti ______.

Nasi ______ dan ____ saja, Bu, seperti ______.

Baik. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ari?

Baik. Biasanya _____ minum apa, Ari?

_______. Biasanya _____ mi-num apa, Ari?

Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi pada pagi hari.

Kopi, Bu. Saya suka sekali minum kopi _____ pagi hari.

Kopi, Bu. Saya ____ sekali minum kopi ______ pagi hari.

Lesson 43

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau membantu saya? Halaman rumah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau _______ saya? Halaman ru-mah cukup kotor. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan _______ untuk saya?

O ya, Ari, apakah kamu mau _______ saya? Halaman ru-mah cukup ______. Apakah kamu bisa membersihkan _______ untuk _______?

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti siang saja, kira-kira jamsebelas. Saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Tentu saja bisa, Bu. Tetapi nanti ______ saja, kira-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau man-di dan _______ dulu.

Tentu saja ______, Bu. Tetapinanti ______ saja, kira-kira jam sebelas. Saya mau ________ dan _______ dulu.

Baik. Terima kasih banyak, Ari.

Baik. Terima _____ banyak, Ari.

Baik. Terima _____ _____, Ari.

Role Play: An Ibu Kos Interrogates her Lodgers

Back in Lesson 37 you acted out a role play titled “What Time Did You Get Home Last Night?”Now repeat this role play with a few variations and refinements. This time, the landlady (ibu kos) ata student boarding house (rumah kos) interrogates two or more of her lodgers about where theywent and what they got up to the previous night. In many rumah kos there is a curfew and the ibukos takes a motherly and often severe interest in her lodgers. So make her strict and implacablyinquisitive. Go back to Lesson 37 and refresh your memory on the vocabulary and sentences thatyou can use to talk about what someone did “last night”. In addition to these resources, youshould make intensive use of the words kami, tadi malam, mengapa, kenapa and karena that youhave practised in this lesson and the previous one. For example, the ibu kos may ask:

Kenapa kamu pulang jam dua belas tadi malam?Why did you come home at 12 o’clock last night?Kenapa kamu pulang naik sepeda motor? Kenapa kamu tidak pulang naik bus?Why did you come home by motorbike? Why didn’t you come home by bus?

The cornered lodgers will answer with explanations, excuses or “unlikely stories” beginningwith karena and will refer to themselves collectively with the pronoun kami.

Karena kami pergi ke gereja, dan sesudah itu kami pergi ke perpustakaan.Because we went to church, and after that we went to the library.Karena tadi malam tidak ada bus. Kami tidak punya uang dan tidak ada taksi.Because last night there were no buses. We had no money and there were no taxis.

You have to concentrate on two main tasks in acting this (and any other) role play. First, youmust concentrate very carefully on speaking smoothly and absolutely correctly. Second, youmust let your own creativity loose on the situation, bringing your command of Indonesian to life byembellishing the role play with variation, humour and your own personality.

Kamu masih ngorok aku udah bangun

You are about to listen to a conversation somewhat like the conversation between Ariand Ibu Gah. But this time Ari is talking to Nuning, another student who lives in the samerumah kos and who is about the same age as Ari. They speak to each other politely, but inthe relaxed, occasionally slangy, Jakarta influenced idiom. To highlight the special fea-

Lesson 43

tures of their colloquial style let’s put their conversation side-by-side with a version of the conver-sation in formal Indonesian. Note the differences in vocabulary. The pronouns saya and Anda arereplaced by aku and kamu and the formal terms sekali, mengapa, membuat, and dengan are re-placed respectively by banget, kenapa, bikin, and sama. Notice too how colloquial Indonesianuses shortened forms, especially by dropping the ber- and me- prefixes on verbs. Other wordsare shortened too, or deleted: apakah becomes apa or disappears altogether, saja becomes aja,sudah becomes udah, and terima kasih becomes makasih. Enjoy!

Listen to Sound File 043-03.

Informal Formal

Pagi, Ri. Udah bangun, ya? Selamat pagi, Ari. Sudah bangun, ya?

Udah. Udah lama. Kamu masih ngorok aku udah bangun. Tapi aku keluar untuk jalan-jalan dulu.

Sudah. Sudah lama. Saya bangun tadi sebelum Anda. Tetapi saya keluar untuk berjalan-jalan dulu.

Kalo pagi, kamu suka jalan-jalan? Apakah Anda suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi hari?

Suka banget. Biasanya aku jalan sekeliling taman. Kalo pagi aku suka duduk-duduk di taman untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Suka sekali. Biasanya saya berjalan sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman pada pagi hari untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Apa banyak burung di taman? Apakah banyak burung di taman?

Banyak dan macam-macam. Ramai banget.

Banyak dan bermacam-macam. Ramai sekali.

Jam berapa kamu bangun? Jam berapa Anda bangun?

Biasanya aku bangun jam lima. Tapi tadi aku bangun jam setengah enam.

Biasanya saya bangun jam lima. Tetapi tadi saya bangun jam setengah enam.

O, aku masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam aku belajar sampai jam dua belas.

O, saya masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jamdua belas.

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Mengapa Anda belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Karena aku ambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya mengambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Sulit? Kenapa? Sulit? Mengapa?

Karena kami harus baca banyak buku. Kami juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Karena kami harus membaca banyak buku. Kami juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Lesson 43

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Kenapa? Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Mengapa?

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka bikin undang-undang.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka membuat undang-undang.

O gitu. Eh, Ning, kamu udah mandi, belum? Aku boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

O begitu. Eh, Nuning, Anda sudah mandi atau belum? Apakah saya boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

Boleh. Aku udah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi udah kosong.

Silakan. Saya sudah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi sudah kosong.

Makasih. Kamu mau masak hari ini? Terima kasih. Apakah Anda akan masak hari ini?

Ya. Aku mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Ya. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Anda mau makan apa?

Nasi putih sama ikan aja, seperti biasa. Nasi putih dan ikan saja, seperti biasa.

Beres. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ri? Baik. Biasanya Anda minum apa, Ari?

Kopi. Kamu udah bersihkan halaman tadi?

Kopi. O ya, apakah Anda sudah membersihkan halaman tadi?

Belum. Apa kamu mau bersihkan halaman untuk aku?

Belum. Apakah Anda mau membersihkan halaman untuk saya?

Bisa. Tapi aku mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Boleh. Tetapi saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.



kami to watch sampai to take

untuk to wake up melihat until

bangun university teacher menonton to see

dosen we (excl.) membeli dirty

kotor for; in order to membersihkan all okay

beres festivity mencari famous

tua to look for mengambil to clean

pesta to buy terkenal old

Lesson 43



1. ingin a. can

2. ingin sekali b. will

3. mau c. to really like, to love (doing something)

4. suka d. must, have to

5. suka sekali e. to really wish/want (to...)

6. akan f. to like (someone or something)

7. harus g. to wish/want (to...)

8. bisa h. to want (something), to want (to do something)


Urutkan kata-kata berikut menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai dengan arti di bawah ini:

1. “Why do you wake up at 4:30?”Mengapa—lima—Anda—setengah—jam—bangun—pagi?

2. “Why don’t you like to go for a walk in the morning?”Mengapa—suka—pada—tidak—pagi—Anda—berjalan-jalan—hari?

3. “Why doesn’t Gatot want to watch a film with us?”Mengapa—Gatot—mau—film—dengan—tidak—menonton—kita?

4. “Why do you usually listen to the radio in the morning?”Mengapa—biasanya—mendengarkan—pagi—Anda—radio—pada—hari?

5. “Why don’t you like to live in New York?”Mengapa—tinggal—Anda—tidak—di—suka—New York?

Latihan 4—Isian

Mengapa (why) and karena (because) go together. Questions with mengapa usually demand ananswer with karena. You can also use mengapa in conjunction with tidak, like the English ‘whynot?’ and ‘why don’t you ...?’

Complete the following dialogue using six of the following eight words: bangun—dosen—harus—karena—memberikan—kenapa—pergi—saya

A: Besok pagi saya akan ______ jam enam.

B: ______?

A: ______ ada kuliah jam delapan.

Lesson 43

B: Jam delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda ______ kuliah jam delapan pagi?

A: Karena Ibu ______ lebih suka ______ kuliah pagi-pagi.

Latihan 5—Buat Kalimat: dulu

As you learned in Lesson 29, dulu can mean ‘first’ referring to something done before some-thing else happens, or before you do something else. When dulu is used in this sense it followsthe verb in a clause, or it follows a noun or adverb. Dulu can also mean something like ‘for thetime being’, or ‘for the moment’. Dulu also means something like ‘in former times’, ‘a long timeago’ and also ‘used to’. When it is used in this sense it usually comes at the beginning of aclause.

Translate the following sentences into good Indonesian using “dulu”.

1. I want to stay here for the moment.

2. I used to live here (a long time ago).

3. Take a seat for the time being.

4. I’d like to take a bath first (before doing anything else).

5. Formerly there was a cinema here.

Latihan 6—Pilihan Ganda: dulu vs tadi

Complete the following sentences using either dulu or tadi. Remember that dulu means “in former times”, “a long time ago” and “used to” whereas tadi means “earlier today”, and “a short time ago”.

1. ......... saya suka bersenam, tetapi sekarang saya tidak bisa. Saya sudah tua!A. DuluB. Tadi

2. Aduh! Saya kotor sekali! Saya mau mandi ....A. duluB. tadi

3. ......... malam mereka pergi ke pesta di rumah teman.A. DuluB. Tadi

4. Katanya, ada orang yang mencari saya ......... pagi.A. duluB. tadi

5. Maaf, saya tidak bisa ikut. Saya harus belajar .........A. duluB. tadi

Lesson 43

6. Sekarang saya tinggal di Jakarta, tetapi ......... saya tinggal di Prancis.A. duluB. tadi

7. ......... siang mereka membersihkan halaman rumah.A. DuluB. Tadi

8. Saya harus mengambil uang ......... sebelum berangkat.A. duluB. tadi

9. Mereka datang ......... malam.A. duluB. tadi

10. ........., kira-kira jam sembilan, saya melihat Yudi minum kopi di warung.A. DuluB. Tadi


Dengarkanlah Rekaman 043-04 dan pilihlah arti pertanyaan-pertanyaan itu.

1. a. Are there many flowers in the yard?2. b. Ari, will you cook today?3. c. Can you help washing the dishes?4. d. Do you like to do sports in the late afternoon?5. e. Good morning, Ari. You’ve already eaten, haven’t you?6. f. What do you usually cook, Ari?7. g. What time do you go to bed?8. h. Why do you have to study Dutch?9. i. Why do you work until 21:30?

10. j. Why is the political science lecture so hard?

Latihan 8—Menjodohkan: Informal & Formal

Match the informal items with formal items.

1. udah a. membuat2. kalo pagi b. saja3. banget c. membersihkan 4. bersihkan d. berjalan-jalan5. kenapa e. terima kasih

Lesson 43

6. sama f. mengapa7. makasih g. membaca8. bikin h. sekali9. jalan-jalan i. pada pagi hari

10. aja j. dan, dengan11. baca k. bermacam-macam12. ambil l. sudah 13. macam-macam m. begitu14. gitu n. mengambil


Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words. For example:the word aku is replaced with saya; and the word kamu is replaced with Anda.Listen to Sound File 043-05 to check your answers.

Percakapan Ari dan Nuning IAri Pagi, Ri. Udah bangun, ya? Selamat pagi, Ari. ______ bangun, ya?Nuning Udah. Udah lama. Kamu masih ngorok

aku udah bangun. Tapi aku keluar un-tuk jalan-jalan dulu.

______. ______ lama. Saya bangun tadi sebe-lum Anda. Tetapi saya keluar untuk ______ dulu.

Ari Kalo pagi, kamu suka jalan-jalan? Apakah Anda suka ______ ______?Nuning Suka banget. Biasanya aku jalan seke-

liling taman. Kalo pagi aku suka du-duk-duduk di taman untuk mende-ngarkan burung-burung.

Suka ______. Biasanya saya ______ sekeliling taman. Saya suka duduk-duduk di taman ______ untuk mendengarkan burung-burung.

Ari Apa banyak burung di taman? Apakah banyak burung di taman?Nuning Banyak dan macam-macam. Ramai

banget.Banyak dan ______. Ramai ______.

Ari Jam berapa kamu bangun? Jam berapa Anda bangun?Nuning Biasanya aku bangun jam lima. Tapi

tadi aku bangun jam setengah enam.Biasanya saya bangun jam lima. Tetapi tadi saya bangun jam setengah enam.

Ari O, aku masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam aku belajar sampai jam dua belas.

O, saya masih tidur tadi jam setengah enam. Tadi malam saya belajar sampai jam dua be-las.

Nuning Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? Kenapa kamu belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Aduh! Sampai jam dua belas? ______ Anda belajar sampai jam dua belas?

Ari Karena aku ambil mata kuliah hukum. Hukum cukup sulit.

Karena saya ______ mata kuliah hukum. Hu-kum cukup sulit.

Lesson 43


Replace all informal and slangy words with formal Indonesian words; then listen to Sound File 043-06 to check your answers.

Percakapan Ari dan Nuning IIAri Sulit? Kenapa? Sulit? ______?

Nuning Karena kami harus baca banyak buku. Juga kami harus belajar bahasa Belan-da.

Karena kami harus ______ banyak buku. Kami juga harus belajar bahasa Belanda.

Ari Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? Kena-pa?

Harus belajar bahasa Belanda? ______?

Nuning Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indonesia, dan mereka bikin un-dang-undang.

Karena dulu orang Belanda berkuasa di Indo-nesia, dan mereka ______ undang-undang.

Ari O gitu. Eh, Ning, kamu udah mandi, belum? Aku boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

O ______. Eh, Nuning, Anda ______ mandi atau belum? Apakah saya boleh pakai kamar mandi sekarang?

Nuning Silakan. Aku udah mandi tadi. Kamar mandi udah kosong.

Silakan. Saya ______ mandi tadi. Kamar man-di ______ kosong.

Ari Makasih. Kamu mau masak hari ini? ______. Apakah Anda akan masak hari ini?

Nuning Ya. Aku mau ke dapur sekarang untuk masak. Kamu mau makan apa?

Ya. Saya mau ke dapur sekarang untuk ma-sak. Anda mau makan apa?

Ari Nasi putih sama ikan aja, seperti biasa. Nasi putih ______ ikan saja, seperti biasa.

Nuning Beres. Biasanya kamu minum apa, Ri? ______. Biasanya Anda minum apa, Ari?

Ari Kopi. Kamu udah bersihkan halaman tadi?

Kopi. O ya, apakah Anda ______ ______ hala-man tadi?

Nuning Belum. Apa kamu mau bersihkan hala-man untuk aku?

Belum. Apakah Anda mau membersihkan ha-laman untuk saya?

Ari Bisa. Tapi aku mau mandi dan makan dulu.

Boleh. Tetapi saya mau mandi dan makan dulu.



1. pagi-pagi a. earlier this afternoon

2. tadi pagi b. a subject of study at a university

3. bahasa Belanda c. the Dutch language

4. mata kuliah d. last night

Lesson 43

5. tadi siang e. earlier this morning

6. duduk-duduk f. the landlady of a boarding house

7. ibu kos g. very early in the morning

8. tadi malam h. to sit around leisurely


Mendatar:2. used to; in former

times6. to reign, rule7. the law8. to make sth

(informal)12. old13. morning 14. why (formal)15. to give (something

to someone)Menurun:1. because2. a lecturer (at a

university)3. difficult4. famous5. to make sth (formal)6. to visit9. to study at a

university10. to look for; to

search11. to get up (out of

bed)

Lesson 44

Tertawa Di Pasar Burung

Aims

• To practise using the word pandai. • To comprehend the subtle difference

between pandai and pintar • To read a story and perform a role play in

which mengapa, karena and pandai areused and the words for colours revised.

Vocabulary review


berlari to run menulis to writeberenang to swim mulai to begin, to startbertanya to ask a question pakaian clothes, clothingbetul correct pasti sure, definitecantik pretty, beautiful pegawai employeecukup enough pembantu assistant, helperhanya only pulau islandlebih more sayuran vegetablemahal expensive tentang aboutmajalah magazine tertawa laughmempunyai to have

To Be Good At...

The word pandai means “to be good at”, or “skilled at (doing something)”. Study how pandai isused in these sentences.

Dia pandai bermain bulu tangkis.She’s good at playing badminton.

Kandang burung di Pasar Burung. © Eric Lafforgue

44

Lesson 44

Dulu saya pandai menyanyi.I used to be good at singing.Siapa yang pandai membaca bahasa Arab?Who’s good at reading Arabic?

Pandai can be “tweaked” in various ways to express variations on the idea of being good atsomething.

pandai sekalivery good at

Dia pandai sekali membuat pakaian.She’s very good at making clothes.

cukup pandaiquite good at

Dia cukup pandai menyanyi seperti Madonna.She’s quite good at singing like Madonna.

kurang pandainot much good at

Kami kurang pandai bermain bulu tangkis.We’re not much good at (playing) badminton.

tidak begitu pandainot really very good at

Saya tidak begitu pandai masak sayuran.I’m not really very good at cooking vegetables.

tidak pandaino good at

Saya tidak pandai menulis dalam bahasa Jepang.I’m no good at writing in Japanese.

sama sekali tidak pandaito be totally hopeless at

Saya sama sekali tidak pandai masak.I’m a hopeless cook.

lebih pandaito be better at

Mereka lebih pandai bermain sepak bola.They are better at soccer.

Cara Indonesia: “Clever” in English and in Indonesian

Pandai often means “to be good at” but in certain contexts it can also betranslated by the English terms “clever”, “bright”, “smart”, “intelligent” etc. even“knowledgeable”. If pandai is used in that meaning then it is synonym with pintar’smart’.

Sarah anak pandai/pintar.Sarah is a bright child.Saya kira Bupati kita kurang pandai/pintar. Tetapi pembantunyapandai/pintar sekali.I don’t think our Bupati is that clever. But his assistant is

very clever.

The Indonesian pandai differs in a very fundamental respect from English words like “clever”,“bright”, “smart”, “intelligent”, “knowledgeable” etc., which, in Indonesian, are better translated aspintar. In English “clever” describes an innate attribute – something that is always with you. Butthe Indonesian pandai is more a skill or a capacity that can come and go. You can get a feel forthis in these sentences.

Anak kami sudah bersekolah, sudah mulai pintar.Our daughter goes to school now, she’s beginning to show signs of intelligence.Dulu saya pandai bermain piano, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi.I used to be good at playing the piano, but not any more.

Lesson 44

To illustrate how pandai can be used, here is a description of the skills and talents of agroup of people (Sound File 044-01):

yah saya cukup istimewa. Ia pandai menulis. Dia menulis tentang politik dan ekonomidi majalah dan surat kabar. Dia pernah menulis buku tentang ekonomi desa di pulau

Timor. Ibu saya juga istimewa. Dia pandai sekali berdagang. Dia membeli biji kopi di desa,lalu ia menjual biji itu ke pabrik kopi di kota. Adik saya Ningsih cukup pandai bermain gi-tar dan menyanyi. Ia pandai menyanyikan lagu-lagu pop. Katanya dia ingin sekali ikut aca-ra Indonesian Idol di televisi. Saya sama sekali tidak pandai menulis, berdagang atau ber-main musik. Tetapi saya cukup pandai berolahraga. Saya bermain bulu tangkis dan bolavoli. Saya juga cukup pandai berenang dan bersenam. Saya ingin menjadi guru olahraga disekolah menengah pertama. Teman saya Sari juga pandai berolahraga. Kadang-kadangkami bermain bulu tangkis di gedung olahraga di dekat rumah keluarga. Biasanya saya me-nang tetapi kadang-kadang saya kalah. Sari memang pandai sekali bermain bulu tangkis.Tetapi dia ingin menjadi pegawai negeri, bukan guru seperti saya.

A

Exercise 44-01

Taking the passage on the previous page as your beginning point, write a description of theskills and talents of a group of family and/or friends. Lift sentences and phrases from the passage,but change them so that they reflect the profile of the group you are describing. Listed below aresome of the verbs you can use to do this, grouped into eight categories of important skills. Eachof the items in the list will be preceded by pandai, tidak pandai, cukup pandai etc. Write at leasttwenty sentences.

• Musicmenyanyibermain musik / gitarmenyanyikan lagu...

• Sportberolahragabermain tenis / bulu tangkis / sepak bola / bola volibersenamberenangberlari

• Writingmenulismenulis surat / buku / novel / ...menulis tentang politik / ekonomi / film / musik / olahraga / masakan Prancis / ..

• Speaking foreign languagesberbicara dalam bahasa Belanda / bahasa Indonesia / bahasa Jepang / ...bercakap-cakap / menulis / membaca dalam bahasa ...

• Cookingmasakmasak nasi goreng / ayam goreng / sayuran / tempe dan tahu / makanan Cina / ...membuat sate / roti / kue / ...

Lesson 44

• Working with your handsmembuat alat-alat rumah tangga / meja / kursi / pakaian / baju / ...memperbaiki rumah / komputer / mobil / sepeda / sepeda motor / ...

• Shoppingberbelanjamencari pakaian yang indah / restoran yang enak / toko yang murah / ...membeli pakaian yang keren / makanan yang enak /

• Doing businessberdagangmembeli dan menjual rumah / buah-buahan / mobil / alat-alat rumah tangga / ...

Don’t forget to make your narrative interesting by (i) referring to some of the accomplishmentsand ambitions of your group, and (ii) by describing what members of the group don’t do particu-larly well.

Tertawa di Pasar Burung

Indonesia is burdened with a huge government bureaucracy. Many of the country’s bureau-crats are hard working and not paid nearly enough for the good work they do. But quite a few areprobably paid more than is justified by the work they do. Plenty of sarcastic and scurrilous storiescirculate about self-important, lazy officials who don’t deserve the money they are paid. The fol-lowing story was told by the Rektor (President or Vice-Chancellor) of an Indonesian university. Hehappens to be a particularly efficient and hard working Rektor, but nevertheless he told this an-ti-bureaucracy joke against himself. It was intended to explain in a self-deprecating way that, as abureaucrat with an impressive job description, he gets the top money at his university while (so hemodestly said) there are many other people on his staff who are cleverer and who do the realwork.

Read The Rektor’s Joke below and check the vocabulary for this lesson if you come acrosswords you don’t know yet.

The Rektor’s Jokeulu ada orang yang suka burung. Dia ingin mempunyai burung yang bagus. Satu haridia pergi ke pasar burung. Banyak sekali burung di sana. Ada yang besar, ada yang ke-

cil. Ada yang merah, ada juga yang putih. Ada yang hijau, ada juga yang hitam. Ada jugaburung yang bermacam-macam warnanya.

DOrang itu bertanya kepada orang yang menjual burung di pasar itu.

“Saya suka burung itu. Burung yang merah itu. Burung itu bagus sekali. Berapa harga-nya?”

“Harganya? Hanya seratus ribu dolar,” jawab orang itu.“Hah!!?? Seratus ribu dolar? Untuk satu burung? Aduh! Mahal sekali! Mengapa burung

itu mahal sekali?”“Karena burung itu pandai menyanyi.”“Memang biasanya burung pandai menyanyi.”“Betul. Tetapi burung ini istimewa. Dia pandai menyanyikan lagu opera Wagner.”

Lesson 44

“Opera Wagner? Seperti Tannhäuser, The Twilight of the Gods dan The Flying Dutch-man?”

“Betul. Burung ini pandai menyanyikan lagu opera-opera itu.”“Hmmm. Lalu burung yang lain itu, yang di sana, yang hijau. Burung itu juga cantik.

Berapa harganya?”“Wah, burung itu cukup mahal. Harganya dua ratus ribu dolar.”“Haaaah!?! Dua ratus ribu??? Mengapa burung yang hijau itu mahal sekali?”“Karena burung itu pandai bermain tenis.”“Burung itu pandai bermain tenis?”“Ya. Ia pernah bermain dengan Roger Federer. Federer kalah. Banyak orang menonton

pertandingan itu. Keluar dalam acara olahraga di televisi. Apakah Anda juga melihat per-tandingan itu?”

“Hmmm, tidak. Dan burung yang lain itu? Yang warnanya biru. Burung itu bagus se-kali. Berapa harganya?”

“Wah. Burung itu mahal harganya. Empat ratus ribu dolar.”“Haaah!!?? Empat ratus ribu? Mengapa? Mengapa burung itu mahal sekali?”“Karena burung itu ahli filsafat. Dia pandai berpikir. Dia pintar seperti Sokrates, Des-

cartes, Konghucu, Bertrand Russell dan Ki Ageng Suryomentaram. Dulu dia kuliah di Uni-versitas Nasional Australia di kota Canberra.”

“Burung itu dulu belajar di Universitas Nasional Australia? Universitas Nasional Austra-lia itu universitas yang bagus sekali. Burung itu pasti pintar sekali. Tetapi empat ratus ribudolar? Mahal sekali. Saya tidak mungkin dapat membeli burung yang harganya empat ratusribu dolar. Lalu, yang lain lagi itu, yang di sana, yang berwarna hitam. Berapa harga burungitu?”

“Wah, burung itu istimewa. Burung itu satu juta dolar.”“Haah?? Satu juta? Mengapa?”“Karena burung itu pandai menulis novel. Apakah Anda sudah pernah membaca novel

Perang dan Damai?”“Sudah. Tolstoy yang menulis novel itu.”“Maaf, Anda salah. Bukan Tolstoy yang menulis novel itu. Burung yang hitam itu yang

menulis novel Perang dan Damai. Burung itu juga menulis A Tale of Two Cities, The Countof Monte Cristo, Pride and Prejudice, Harry Potter, Desperate Housewives dan banyak lagi.”

“Aduh. Burung itu pintar juga. Masih ada satu burung lagi. Yang di sana. Yang berwar-na putih. Berapa harga burung itu?”

“Yang putih? Harganya sepuluh juta dolar.”“Aduh!!! Sepuluh juta? Apakah burung itu pandai menyanyi?”“Tidak”“Apakah burung itu pandai bermain tenis?”“Tidak.”“Apakah burung itu ahli filsafat?”“Bukan.”

Lesson 44

“Apakah burung itu pandai menulis novel?”“Tidak juga.”“Lalu mengapa burung itu mahal sekali? Mengapa harganya sepuluh juta dolar?”“Karena burung itu koordinatornya!”

Exercise 44-02

Every time a joke like the one above is told it is a little different from its previous telling. Retain-ing the punch line, and using simple Indonesian, rewrite this joke. Make it a bit shorter if you like.Stick close to the format, vocabulary and sentences of the joke as it appears above but use yourimagination to make changes. Change the colours of the birds and their prices. Change the ac-complishments of the birds (except the last one). Perhaps you can think of other accomplish-ments and skills that your current Indonesian vocabulary allows you to mention. But whatever youwrite don’t forget: keep it funny.

Role Play: Mencari Burung di Pasar Burung

Taking the model conversation above as your beginning point, act out the events of the birdfancier’s visit to the Bird Market. Try to memorise as much as you can of the model, but changethe colours of the birds and their prices. Use your imagination to change their accomplishmentstoo. Change the order of the components in the model conversation. In short, concentrate onspeaking correctly by memorising the model, but add your own variations and humour. Make cut-outs of different coloured birds as props for you to point at. Perhaps members of your class canplay the roles of the spectacularly clever birds by crouching on chairs or desks and describingtheir talents (in good Indonesian, of course).

Above all remember: no English, only lively, correct Indonesian – and if possible, a few laughs.

Forum Diskusi 44-03

Share with everyone else in the class what your hobbies and favourite activities are. Make de-liberate use of “Saya pandai” or “saya lumayan pandai” (I am pretty good at...), and “saya suka”.



berlari beautiful mempunyai vegetablesberenang correct menulis assistantbertanya expensive mulai clothingbetul magazine pakaian definitelycantik more, -er pasti employeemajalah only pegawai islandhanya to swim pembantu to begin

Lesson 44

lebih to ask a question pulau to havemahal to run sayuran to write

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan I

Pandai can be ‘tweaked’ in various ways:

1. pandai sekali a. no good at2. cukup pandai b. not much good at3. kurang pandai c. not really very good at4. tidak begitu pandai d. quite good at5. tidak pandai e. to be better at6. sama sekali tidak pandai f. to be totally hopeless at7. lebih pandai g. very good at

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan II

Jodohkan rekaman dengan artinya di sebelah kanan.—Listen to the ten sentences in Sound File 044-02 and order them correctly.

1. a. I used to be good at singing.2. b. I’m a hopeless cook.3. c. I’m no good at writing in Japanese.4. d. I’m not really very good at cooking vegetables.5. e. She’s good at playing badminton.6. f. She’s quite good at singing like Madonna.7. g. She’s very good at making clothes.8. h. They are better at soccer.9. i. We’re not much good at (playing) badminton.

10. j. Who’s good at reading Arabic?

Latihan 4—Menjodohkan III

Although pandai also occurs in the meaning “smart, clever, intelligent” it is more often associ-ated with certain skills rather than with innate attributes—something that is always with you—which are more likely to be expressed by pintar.

Match the Indonesian sentence with its equivalent in English.

1. Sarah anak yang pintar sekali. a. I don’t think the Bupati is smart.2. Saya kira Bupati tidak pintar. b. I used to sing well, but not any

more.

Lesson 44

3. Anak kami sudah bersekolah, sudah mulai pintar.

c. I’m not a good gardener.

4. Dulu saya pandai menyanyi, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi.

d. Our daughter goes to school now,she’s beginning to show signs of intelligence.

5. Saya tidak pandai berkebun. e. Sarah is a very bright child.


Urutkanlah kata-kata di bawah ini menjadi kalimat yang baik sesuai arti di bawah ini:

1. “I don’t think that man is smart.”Saya—itu—laki-laki—tidak—kira—pintar.

2. “I used to be good at playing the piano, but not any more.”Dulu—tidak—saya—sekarang—main—pandai—tetapi—piano,—lagi.

3. “I’m a hopeless cook.”Saya—pandai—sekali—sama—tidak—memasak.

Latihan 6—PemahamanRead The Rektor’s Joke and answer the following questions:

1. What kinds of birds are NOT mentioned at the bird market?A. big & smallB. red & whiteC. green & blackD. purple & pink

2. How much does the red bird cost?A. $1,000B. $10,000C. $100,000D. $1,000,000

3. Why is the red bird so expensive?A. Because it is good at singing.B. Because of its beatiful colour.C. Because it is very young.D. Because it is smart.

4. How much does the green bird cost?A. $2,000B. $20,000C. $200,000D. $2,000,000

Lesson 44

5. Why is the green bird so expensive?A. Because that bird is good at playing tennis.B. Because that bird is good at playing music.C. Because that bird is very funny.D. Because that bird enjoys playing tennis.

6. How much did the blue bird cost?A. $4,000B. $40,000C. $400,000D. $4,000,000

7. Why is the blue bird so expensive?A. Because that bird is good at singing.B. Because that bird is good at thinking.C. Because that bird is good at playing tennis.D. Because that bird has a nice blue colour.

8. How much does the black bird cost?A. $1,000B. $10,000C. $100,000D. $1,000,000

9. Why is the black bird so expensive?A. Because that bird is good at singing.B. Because that bird is good at playing tennis.C. Because that bird has a nice black colour.D. Because that bird is good at writing novels.

10. How much did the white bird cost?A. $10,000B. $100,000C. $1,000,000D. $10,000,000

11. Why is the white bird so expensive?A. Because that bird is good at writing novels.B. Because that bird is the coordinator.C. Because that bird is good at playing tennis.D. Because that bird is good at thinking.

Latihan 7—Isian

Translate English in parentheses. Choose from the following words: yang—bertanya—betul—biasanya—hanya—harganya—istimewa—jawab—karena—mahal—mempunyai—menjual—menyanyi—menyanyikan—merah—ribu—suka

Dulu ada orang yang (likes) burung. Dia ingin (to own) burung yang bagus. Satu hari dia pergi ke pasar burung. Banyak sekali burung di sana. Ada yang besar, ada (that are) kecil. [...]

Orang itu (asked) kepada orang yang (sells) burung di pasar itu.

Lesson 44

‘Saya suka burung itu. Burung yang (red) itu. Burung itu bagus sekali. Berapa (does it cost)?’‘Harganya? (Only) seratus ribu dolar,’ (answered) orang itu.‘Hah!!? Seratus (thousand) dolar? Untuk satu burung? Aduh! (expensive) sekali! Mengapa

burung itu mahal sekali?’‘(Because) burung itu pandai (sing).’‘Memang (usually) burung pandai menyanyi.’‘(That’s right). Tetapi burung ini (special). Dia pandai (sing) lagu opera Wagner.’


Mendatar:4. to sing6. to be good at; clever10. to sell something11. special, exceptional12. not really, lacking,

less14. a guitar15. once, ever in the

past16. vegetables17. to think, to ruminate18. millionMenurun:1. a seed, small item2. to lose3. to trade4. to become; to be5. to swim7. correct8. to repair 9. a song10. to win13. to laugh

Lesson 45

Asking Who

Aims

• To practise using siapa toask questions about who isdoing something.

• To revise the use of someverbs with me- prefixes.

• To review the use ofcommon kinship terms.

Vocabulary review

Here are some of the frequentwords used in this lesson that haveappeared in previous lessons. Makesure that you remember their mean-ings.

anjing dog pembantu assistant baju shirt, clothes rumah tangga householdberangkat to depart, leave semua all, everyonebertemu to meet surat lettergarasi garage surat kabar newspaperkemarin yesterday tadi malam last nightkembali to go back, to return tidur to sleep membuat to make (something) permisi dulu excuse me (when taking

leave)mencuci to wash

Asking Who Does/Did Something

You have already met the word siapa several times. You have practised using it to ask about aperson’s name.

Siapa nama Anda?What is your name?

45

Lesson 45

Siapa nama ayah Anda?What is your father’s name?

Siapa nama teman Mita?What is Mita’s friend’s name?

You can also use siapa before a verb to ask who does/did something. When siapa is used inthis way, usually the connector yang appears between siapa and the verb. Study these examples:

Siapa yang datang ke rumah Anda tadi malam?Who came to your place last night?

Siapa yang menolong Anda menulis surat ini?Who helped you to write this letter?

Siapa yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga Anda?Who usually does the shopping in your family?

Some more examples with answers:Siapa yang memakai komputer tadi malam?Who used the computer last night?

Pak Siwabessy.Mr Siwabessy.

Siapa yang mau tidur di hotel?Who wants to sleep at a hotel?

Saya!Me!

Siapa yang memakai baju bagus itu?Who is wearing that great shirt?

Teman saya.My friend.

Siapa yang suka minum kopi pada sore hari?Who enjoys a coffee in the late afternoon?

Ayah.Father.

And if you answer the question with a long answer that repeats the verb that occurred in thequestion you must place yang in front of the verb, just as yang was in front of the verb in thequestion. Study these examples.

Wah! Kue ini enak sekali! Siapa yang membuatnya?Wow. This cake is really nice! Who made it?

Ibu Mariana yang membuat kue itu.Mrs Mariana made the cake.

Siapa yang biasanya mencuci piring di rumah Anda?Who usually washes the dishes at your place?

Saya yang biasanya mencuci piring, tetapi kakak saya yang mencuci pakaian.I’m the one who usually washes the dishes, but my (elder) brother washes

the clothes.

Lesson 45

Selalu and Tidak Pernah

You have already met and practised the adverbs of frequency biasanya (usually) and kadang--kadang (sometimes). To these can now be added selalu (always) and its opposite tidak pernah(never). Selalu and tidak pernah almost never come right at the beginning of a sentence / clause(unlike biasanya and kadang-kadang which often do). Usually selalu and tidak pernah come rightafter the subject of a sentence or clause.

Bapak Tubagus selalu menyanyi pada waktu mandi.Mr Tubagus always sings while taking a bath.

Dia tidak pernah menolong orang yang minta tolong.He never helps people who ask for help.

Study these substitution tables. Practise generating questions and answers from them. Makeyour own entries in the columns marked with a dash or dots.

Pertanyaan

Siapa yangtidak pernahbiasanyaselalu

berbelanjamasakmencuci piringbangun pagi-pagimenonton televisimembersihkan garasimencuci pakaianbercakap-cakap

dalam keluargadi rumah

Pak LimAndaIbu Sutoyo

?

JawabanPak Lim sendiriIsteri Pak LimSaya sendiriIbu Sutoyo sendiriPembantu Ibu Sutoyo

yangtidak pernahselalubiasanya

.................... .

Pertanyaan

Siapa yang

bermain tenisbelajarbercakap-cakapbekerjamakanminummembacamenonton televisimenunggu

di ................... ?

JawabanAyahIbu KandouwSaya dan AniKepala KantorTeman saya KetutKakak sayaSuami Susanti

yang .................. .

Lesson 45

Exercise 45-01

Answer each of the following questions, then answer the follow-up question. Study the ex-ample first.

Pertanyaan: Siapa yang berjalan kaki di sana?Jawaban: Pak Panjaitan yang berjalan kaki di sana.Pertanyaan: Dengan siapa?Jawaban: Sendirian.

1(a) Siapa yang biasanya memelihara anjing-anjing Anda?1(b) Mengapa?

2(a) Siapa yang bekerja di kantor sampai jam sebelas tadi malam?2(b) Dengan siapa?

3(a) Siapa yang mendengarkan radio di ruang keluarga?3(b) Dengan siapa?

4(a) Siapa yang mau bertemu dengan Pak Nainggolan?4(b) Mengapa?

5(a) Siapa yang akan ikut dengan Anda?5(b) Mengapa?

6(a) Siapa yang mengajar sejarah?6(b) Bagaimana dia?

7(a) Siapa yang selalu duduk bercakap-cakap di warung Ibu Katrina?7(b) Dengan siapa?

8(a) Siapa yang pandai masak di sini?8(b) Dia pandai masak apa?

9(a) Siapa yang kuliah di Universitas Airlangga di Surabaya?9(b) Mengapa?

10(a) Siapa yang belum mandi?10(b) Mengapa?

Lesson 45

Exercise 45-02: Teka-Teki

This is a puzzle. Read the clues carefully then answer the final question in Indonesian.

Teka-Tekida empat orang, Ibu Betty, Pak Nurdin, Pak Poli dan Ibu Lina. Mereka semua sukaberjalan-jalan pada pagi hari.A

Ibu Betty selalu bangun pagi-pagi. Ia berangkat dari rumahnya pada jam enam pagi. Ia ber-jalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan ia suka minum kopi di warung SudiMampir sebelum kembali ke rumahnya. Ia selalu pulang pada jam tujuh pagi.Pak Nurdin bangun jam setengah tujuh pagi. Ia keluar dari rumahnya untuk berjalan-jalan.Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama satu jam ia minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. Biasanya iaduduk di warung Sudi Mampir selama sepuluh menit, lalu ia pulang. Pak Poli selalu bangun jam lima. Ia minum kopi dulu di rumahnya. Sesudah setengah jamia keluar untuk berjalan-jalan. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam, lalu ia masuk ke wa-rung Sudi Mampir untuk membeli surat kabar. Biasanya ia duduk di warung membaca su-rat kabar selama setengah jam. Lalu ia pulang. Biasanya Ibu Lina bangun pada jam enam. Selama satu jam ia bekerja di kebunnya. Lalu iaberjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam ia masuk kewarung Sudi Mampir untuk minum kopi. Biasanya ia duduk di warung selama setengahjam.

Pertanyaan: Siapa yang biasanya bertemu di warung Sudi Mampir?Refer to Latihan 10 for the solution of this problem.

Role Play: A Sociologist Investigates Your Household

In this role play a university researcher comes to the front door of your house. He/She is in-vestigating who does the housework in local households. Men or women? Parents or children?Always or just sometimes (or never)?

The researcher will begin by introducing himself/herself. Here is one possible introductionwhich you should learn by heart.

Selamat pagi (or siang/sore/malam) Bu (or Pak). Saya dari Universitas Widya Buana. Bo-leh saya bertanya tentang rumah tangga Anda? Saya ingin tahu siapa yang bekerja dan sia-pa yang tidak bekerja dalam rumah tangga Anda.

As the role play develops you should make as much use as possible of what you learned act-ing the role play “A Visit from a Census Official” in Lesson 30. They include greetings, introduc-tions, smalltalk, inviting the visitor to eat/drink, asking how many people there are in the house,getting/giving the personal details of residents and much more. In Module 2 you also practisedthe common kinship terms of Indonesian and these should be “recycled” too. So review Module2, then learn by heart and add the following key question shell.

Lesson 45

Siapa yang selalubiasanya

mencuci piringmencuci pakaianmembersihkan rumahmembersihkan kamar mandi dan WCmembersihkan jendelamencuci mobilmasakbekerja di kebunmembersihkan halamanberbelanja untuk membeli makanan

dalam rumah tangga ini?

These questions can be answered in several different ways. For example you can begin withbiasanya:

Biasanya

sayaanak sayaibu sayakakak sayapacar saya

yangmembersihkan.........mencuci.........masak.........

.

Or you can use selalu in your answer. Bearing in mind that selalu comes after the subject of asentence, you might answer like this:

SayaTeman sayaOrang tua sayaIstri sayaAdik saya

yang selalumembersihkan.........mencuci.........masak.........

.

You should look for every possible chance to add follow-up information. For example you canuse tetapi to begin a sentence that modifies the information you first gave.

Tetapikadang-kadangpada hari Sabtupada pagi hari

suami sayateman sayaayah saya

yangmembersihkan.....mencuci.....masak

.

The researcher should look for every opportunity to ask follow-up questions, especially follow-up questions beginning with mengapa. For example:

MengapaAndaanak Andapacar Anda

tidak maumembersihkan.........mencuci.........masak

?

An answer to this question will begin with karena and may have pronouns like dia, mereka andkami in it.

Karenasayadiamerekakami

lebih sukatidak sukaharustidak pandai

pergi ke.........bekerja di.........membersihkan.........

.

To finish the role play, don’t forget to say thank you and to politely take your leave. Learn thisleave-taking formula by heart.

Terima kasih Pak/Bu. Saya kira sudah cukup. Saya permisi dulu.

Lesson 45



anjing to meet mencuci household baju to depart/leave pembantu yesterdayberangkat dog rumah tangga to wash bertemu shirt; clothes semua last nightgarasi letter surat you’re welcome kemarin assistant surat kabar to sleepkembali newspaper tadi malam to make sthmembuat garage tidur all; everyone


These are all verbs that do not take a prefix, neither meN- nor ber-. Most are intransitive but a small number are transitive: minum, makan, and minta. Match the Indonesian word to its equivalent in English.

masuk to live hidup go; leaveminum to sleep datang to bathemakan to sit pergi follow, joinminta to enter ikut to comebangun to get up mandi to knowduduk to request kembali to eattidur to drink tahu to return

Latihan 3—Menjodohkan: ber-

Ber- verbs are allways intransitive. Some can take a complement such as bermain tenis, or berbicara bahasa Indonesia. But they can never take an object. To learn more about complements, see Sneddon's grammar 3.62-3.64.

berbelanja to stand berasal to chatberumur go shopping berdiri to be agedbermain to depart beristirahat to talkbelajar to originate bercakap-cakap to restbekerja to work berbicara to playberangkat to learn berpikir to think

Lesson 45

Latihan 4—Siapa, Asking Who Does/Did Something

You have already met the word siapa several times. You have practiced using it to ask abouta person’s name. You can also use siapa before a verb to ask who does/did something. When siapa is used in this way, usually the connector ‘yang’ appears between siapa and theverb.

1. Siapa nama Anda? a. What is your father’s name?2. Siapa nama ayah Anda? b. What is Mita’s friend’s name?3. Siapa nama teman Mita? c. What is your name?4. Siapa yang datang ke rumah

Anda tadi malam?d. Who usually does the shopping in

your family?5. Siapa yang menolong Anda me-

nulis surat ini?e. Who helped you write this letter?

6. Siapa yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga Anda?

f. Who came to your house last night?

Latihan 5—Menjodohkan: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban

Jodohkan pertanyaan di sebelah kiri dengan jawaban di sebelah kanan.

1. Siapa yang belajar di perpusta-kaan kemarin?

a. Teman saya Ketut yang mem-baca novel di perpustakaan hari Sabtu yang lalu.

2. Siapa yang makan di warung tadisiang?

b. Pembantunya yang tidak pernah membersihkan garasi.

3. Siapa yang menonton televisi di rumah tadi pagi?

c. Adik saya yang menonton televisi di rumah tadi pagi.

4. Siapa yang membaca novel di perpustakaan hari Sabtu yang lalu?

d. Suami Susanti yang makan di wa-rung tadi siang.

5. Siapa yang tidak pernah mem-bersihkan garasi?

e. Saya yang belajar di perpus-takaan kemarin.

6. Siapa yang bercakap-cakap di ruang keluarga?

f. Kakak saya dan pacarnya yang bercakap-cakap di ruang ke-luarga.

Lesson 45

Latihan 6—Menyimak: Siapa, Asking Who Does/Did Something

Remember that when a question has siapa in it, it usually invites or expects ananswer with the name of a person. But sometimes you can also answer a siapa yangquestion with something that is a substitute for a name, for example a pronoun like saya, Anda etc., or a kinship term like ibu, adik etc., or a title like Bapak Presiden,Ibu guru etc., or sometimes a term indicating a relationship like teman saya, suaminya etc. Listen to Sound File 045-02 and choose the correct answer.

1. a. Tidak ada. Kami lebih suka tidur di rumah.2. b. Sinta. Dia suka baju itu.3. c. Saya yang biasanya mencuci pakaian keluarga saya.4. d. Pak Bambang. Biasanya dia minum kopi jam empat sore.5. e. Nenek saya yang selalu bangun jam setengah lima pagi.6. f. Mbak Parni yang selalu menolong kami.7. g. Kakak dan teman-teman kakak saya yang biasanya bercakap-ca-

kap di rumah Ibu Sutoyo.8. h. Ibu yang biasanya berbelanja dalam keluarga kami.9. i. Adik yang memakainya tadi malam.

10. j. Adik saya yang tidak pernah masak dalam keluarga saya.

Latihan 7—Isian: Kata Dasar & Imbuhan

Add the prefix me- plus the corresponding nasal sound if applicable, i.e. mem-, meng-, men-,or meny-, to the following bases. Please note that initial p, t, k, and s are dropped. Most meN-verbs are transitive. Many meN- verbs, especially those with suffix -kan require an object; othermeN- verbs may take an object, but can also be used without an object.

1. tolong ...................................... to help (someone)2. ajar ...................................... to teach (something)3. pelihara ...................................... to take care of (something)4. tunggu ...................................... to wait (for someone/something)5. pakai ...................................... to use (something)6. dengar ...................................... to hear (something)7. baca ...................................... to read (something)8. cuci ...................................... to wash (something)9. buka ...................................... to open something

10. buat ...................................... to make something11. sapu ...................................... to sweep (something)12. bersihkan ...................................... to clean (something)13. masak ...................................... to cook (something)14. beli ...................................... to buy (something)

Lesson 45



1. “Mrs. Mariana made the cake.”Ibu—Mariana—yang—kue—membuat—itu.

2. “I’m the one who usually washes the dishes, but my (elder) brother washes the clothes.”Saya—biasanya—yang—tetapi—yang—mencuci—mencuci piring,—kakak saya pakaian.

3. “Mr Tubagus always sings while taking a bath.”Bapak—waktu—selalu—menyanyi—pada—Tubagus—mandi.

4. “He never helps people who ask for help.”Dia—tidak—yang—menolong—orang—pernah—minta—tolong.

5. “Thank you, Mrs. Lia, I think this is sufficient.”Terima—sudah—kasih,—saya—Bu Lia,—kira—cukup.

6. “Who is the lady that usually wears red shirts?”Siapa—selalu—baju merah—yang—perempuan—memakai—itu?

Latihan 9—Isian: Teka-Teki

Dengarkanlah Rekaman 045-01 dan lengkapilah bacaan teka-teki di bawah ini.

Ada empat orang, Ibu Betty, Pak Nurdin, Pak Poli dan Ibu Lina. Mereka __________suka berjalan-jalan pada __________ hari.

Ibu Betty __________ bangun pagi-pagi. Ia __________ dari rumahnya pada jam enam pagi. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan ia suka minum kopi di __________ Sudi Mampir sebelum kembali ke rumahnya. Ia selalu pulang pada jam tu-juh pagi.

Pak Nurdin __________ jam setengah tujuh pagi. Ia keluar dari rumahnya untuk berjalan--jalan. __________ berjalan-jalan selama satu jam ia minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir. __________ ia duduk di warung Sudi Mampir __________ sepuluh menit, lalu ia pulang.

Pak Poli selalu bangun jam lima. Ia minum __________ dulu di rumahnya. Sesudah sete-ngah jam ia keluar untuk berjalan-jalan. Ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam, lalu ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir untuk __________ surat kabar. Biasanya ia duduk di wa-rung __________ surat kabar selama setengah jam. Lalu ia pulang.

Biasanya Ibu Lina bangun pada jam enam. Selama satu jam ia __________ di kebunnya. Lalu ia berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam. Sesudah berjalan-jalan selama setengah jam

Lesson 45

ia masuk ke warung Sudi Mampir __________ minum kopi. Biasanya ia __________ di warung selama setengah jam.


Bacalah Teka-Teki di atas dan jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan di bawah ini.

1. Sebelum berjalan-jalan, Ibu Betty minum kopi dulu.A. BenarB. Salah

2. Pada jam 7.45, Pak Nurdin minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir.A. BenarB. Salah

3. Pak Poli selalu minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir.A. BenarB. Salah

4. Sesudah berjalan-jalan, Ibu Lina berkebun.A. BenarB. Salah

5. Ibu Lina dan Ibu Betty suka minum kopi di warung Sudi Mampir.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Siapa yang biasanya bertemu di warung Sudi Mampir?A. Pak Poli dan Pak NurdinB. Ibu Lina dan Ibu BettyC. Pak Poli dan Ibu BettyD. Pak Nurdin dan Ibu Lina

Lesson 45

Latihan 11—Teka Teki Silang (TTS)Mendatar1. to wash3. to meet4. all; everyone6. assistant8. dog9. yesterday10. always11. history14. to wait; to wait for15. to keep (as a pet)16. letter 17. time, at the time when18. to sleepMenurun:1. to make (something)2. for (a certain period of

time)5. to help someone7. to teach12. alone; on your own13. to leave/depart14. to use/wear something

Lesson 46

Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance

Aims

• To get more practice talking aboutdaily routine.

• To role play a dialogue that revolvesaround a person’s daily activities.

Vocabulary Review

Here are some of the frequent wordsused in this lesson that have appeared inprevious lessons. Make sure that you re-member their meanings.

beberapa some, several menunggu to wait for someone

berdiri to stand up nanti dulu just a moment

jam o’clock sampai di... to arrive in

kapan when sarapan to have breakfast

kepada to selama for (a period of time)

memanggil to call out someone telur an egg

mencoba to try to do something ternyata apparently, it seems

How Long?

In Lesson 23 you practised asking and answering questions with the phrase Sudah berapalama...? (How long have you...?). A question with berapa lama (how long) in it usually demands ananswer with a number in it. To introduce this number you can use the prepositions selama (forsuch-and-such a period of time) and sampai (until).

Berapa lama Anda bekerja di kantor tadi?How long did you work at the office (earlier) today?

Selama tiga jam. For three hours. OR Sampai jam dua belas

Until 12 o’clock.Berapa lama mereka tinggal di Sulawesi?

Shutterstock

46

Lesson 46

How long did they live in Sulawesi?

Selama lima tahun. For five years OR Sampai tahun dua ribu sepuluh.

Until 2010.

Exercise 46-01

Use each of the verbs below to form a question beginning with Berapa lama, then write an an-swer to the question beginning with selama or sampai. Study the example first.

berjalan-jalan: Berapa lama mereka berjalan-jalan di pusat kota?sampai: Sampai jam empat. OR (for example) Sampai sore.

1 tinggalselama

5. menontonselama

9. berdansaselama

2. duduk sampai

6. mendengarkan selama

10. bercakap-cakap sampai

3. menunggu selama

7. bermain sampai

11. berolahragasampai

4. belajar sampai

8. berbicara selama

12. bekerjaselama

“What Did _____ Do?”

You have already practised asking questions in the form Apa yang Anda lakukan...? (Whatdo/did you do...?) We have mentioned earlier in Lesson 35 that this form is actually a passive formmeaning literally “What (is it) that (by) you (is) done?”.You can also use the verb lakukan (to do) to ask aboutwhat a third person (he, she) or persons (they) did, butthe question usually has somewhat different forms.

If you are asking what a person did and you mentionthat person by name, you usually say dilakukan oleh...

Apa yang dilakukan oleh Bapak Yusuf?What did Mr Yusuf do? literally What (is it) thatwas done by Mr Yusuf?

If you are asking what he or she did, you usually usethe form dilakukannya or dia lakukan.

Apa yang dia lakukan? / Apa yang dilakukannya?What did he/she do? literally What (is it) that(by) him/her was done?

If you are asking what they did, you usually use theform mereka lakukan:

Apa yang mereka lakukan?What did they do? literally What (is it) that (by)them was done?

Lesson 46

You should learn these variant forms, and the example sentences, by heart, just as you learnedthe question Apa yang Anda lakukan by heart back in Lesson 35.

Apa yang Anda lakukan?What did you do?

Study these question shells and practise generating a variety of questions from them. If youcan, add other phrases to the column on the right. After each question imagine how you wouldsuccinctly and correctly answer it.

Apa yang

dilakukan oleh Pak Alnimereka lakukandia lakukandilakukannya

tadi malamtadi pagitadi siangpada pagi haripada siang haripada sore haripada malam harijam delapan malam

?

Apa yangdilakukan oleh Pak Alnimereka lakukandia lakukandilakukannya

sesudahsebelum

itupulangmakan malampergi ke kantormembeli pakaiankembali dari tokomandi

?

Passive Voice

As we mentioned above, you should learn the above sentences by heart. Since we alreadytold you that the above sentences are in passive voice, we have added this section, which givesadditional information on the subject. This section is for your information only, and is not required.As you will learn more about the differences between active and passive voice later, you cansafely skip this section if the following is over your head.

A clause in which the subject is the recipient of an action by the doer is said to be in passivevoice (if you have no knowledge of what active and passive voices are, it may be helpful to readthe Wikipedia article on English passive voice).

Indonesian has two types of passive verbs:Verbs in Passive Type 1 have the di- prefix. Passive Type 1 is used when the doer is a 3rd per-

son (he/she) or a noun. The doer is optionally marked by oleh (by): Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) PakAli? The third person pronoun dia/ia is rendered -nya: Apa yang dilakukannya?

Verbs in Passive Type 2 do not take any prefix. Passive Type 2 is only used when the doer is apronoun. It is compulsory for 1st and 2nd person pronouns (aku, saya, kita, kami, kamu, Anda), butoptional for 3rd person pronouns (ia, dia, mereka). Apa yang kamu lakukan hari ini? Apa yang dialakukan?

Thus for third person pronouns we can either use PT 1 or PT 2:Apa yang dilakukannya? OR Apa yang dia lakukan? (What does he do?)Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) mereka? OR Apa yang mereka lakukan?

�

�

Lesson 46

But for the 1st or 2nd person we can only use PT 2:

Apa yang kamu lakukan? (What do you do?)Apa yang kita lakukan? (What do we do?)

And for nouns we can only use PT 1:Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) orang itu? (What does that person do?)

Of course, the three above sentences translate literately as “what is done by him”, “what isdone by you” and “what is done by that person”, but in English active voice is often preferred. InIndonesian, however, passive voice is frequently used to focus on the object, rather than on thesubject. In addition, Indonesian has certain structures that require passive voice. As a rule, any re-lative clauses in which the doer (agent) is included, requires passive voice. The sentence Apayang kamu lakukan, for instance, contains the head noun apa, and the relative clause yang kamulakukan, in which yang is the relative pronoun, kamu the agent, and lakukan the passive verb. Inshort, sentences beginning with “apa yang”, “siapa yang” or “(noun) yang” and where the agent isincluded, must be rendered in passive voice.

Exercise 46-02

Translate the following questions into good, simple, correct Indonesian. If you are in doubt about how to translate “do”, review the examples above. Here are some examples to study first.

Question: What did she do this morning?You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi pagi?Question: What did Mr Alni do after breakfast?You write: Apa yang dilakukan oleh Pak Alni sesudah sarapan?Question: What did they do after going shopping?You write: Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja?Question: What did he do last night?You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi malam?

Now begin...

1. What did Mr Alni do before having breakfast?2. What did they do in the afternoon?3. What did Mr Alni do at five o’clock in the afternoon?4. What did she do after taking a bath?5. What did they do after meeting at the restaurant?6. What did Mr Alni do after getting up?7. What did he do at night?8. What did they do in the hotel?9. What did she do after buying flowers?

10. What did they do after watching the movie?

Lesson 46

Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance

Ibu Yusuf is a middle-class lady, the wife of a prosperous businessman. She is suspicious ofher husband. She thinks he is up to no good, but she has no hard evidence. She fears that maybe,just maybe, he is meeting another woman. She needs to have detailed information on everythingthat her husband does in the course of a full day. So she hires a private detective (detektif) to re-port on what her husband does in the course of a day. Using a secret camera the detective tookthe following eight pictures, which, unfortunately, got out of order. Can you help the private de-tective putting them into the right chronological order? What did Pak Yusuf do during that day?Narrate the story to your class mate or jot it down on a piece of paper.

A B

C D

E F

Lesson 46

G H

Bacaan: Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance

Here is a transcript of the briefing given to Ibu Yusuf by the private detective. Read it through carefully and compare it to your own story. Is it the same? What is different?

emarin pagi Pak Yusuf bangun jam enam. Sesudah ba-ngun dia duduk di kebun di belakang rumahnya sela-

ma kira-kira satu jam. Di sana dia minum kopi dan mem-baca surat kabar. Jam tujuh pagi ia masuk ke rumah untukmandi, menggosok gigi dan bersisir. Pak Yusuf berpakaiandi kamar tidur. Lalu dia sarapan di ruang makan. Pak Yusufmakan roti dengan telur dan minum kopi manis. Sambilmakan dia juga mendengarkan musik di radio. Lalu diamembuka komputer untuk membaca berita.

K

Kira-kira jam delapan dia naik mobil ke kantor. Dia sampaidi kantor jam sembilan kurang seperempat.Pak Yusuf bekerja di kantor selama dua jam. Kira-kira jamsebelas siang ia keluar dari kantornya dan berjalan kaki ke toko makanan. Di toko itu iamembeli sebotol anggur yang mahal sekali. Lalu ia berjalan ke toko bunga. Di toko bungadia membeli bunga mawar yang merah dan putih. Kemudian Pak Yusuf memanggil taksi.Ia naik taksi ke Hotel Sheraton – hotel mewah yang tidak jauh dari pusat kota. Ia masuk kehotel dan duduk di lobi.Jam dua belas siang seorang perempuan datang. Dia cantik sekali dan masih muda. Umur-nya kira-kira sembilan belas tahun. Ia memakai pakaian yang mewah. Ia duduk di sampingPak Yusuf. Pak Yusuf memberikan bunga mawar kepada perempuan itu. Mereka bercakap-cakap selama setengah jam.Lalu mereka duduk di restoran. Restoran di Sheraton itu mewah dan mahal. Masakannyamasakan Prancis! Mereka makan roti dengan telur kaviar. Pak Yusuf membuka botol yangdibelinya. Ternyata bukan anggur tetapi sampanye! Selama satu jam mereka makan danbercakap-cakap, tertawa sambil minum sampanye. Pak Yusuf ternyata senang sekali.

Lesson 46

Kira-kira jam setengah dua mereka keluar dari restoran. Di Hotel Sheraton ada banyaktoko, di antaranya toko pakaian wanita. Mereka kira-kira satu jam di toko itu. Perempuanyang cantik itu mencoba beberapa baju yang mewah dan mahal. Akhirnya dia memilih bajubagus dari Italia. Pak Yusuf yang membayar. Pada waktu mereka keluar dari toko perempu-an itu mencium pipi Pak Yusuf.Sesudah itu Pak Yusuf kembali ke kantornya. Tetapi ia tidak bekerja. Ia hanya duduk sajadi mejanya dan melihat ke luar jendela. Kira-kira jam setengah enam ia berdiri dan berjalanke luar. Ia memanggil taksi, tetapi saya tidak tahu ke mana ia pergi. Pak Yusuf pulang kerumahnya kira-kira jam sebelas malam. Sesudah mandi ia tidur.

Here is an English summary of what Pak Yusuf does in this narrative:

• gets up early in the morning • sits in the garden reading a newspaper and drinking coffee • has a bath etc. and gets dressed • has breakfast while listening to the radio • goes to the office by car • works at the office for two hours • leaves the office and walks to a liquor shop: buys a bottle of wine • goes to a flower shop and buys flowers • calls a taxi and goes to a luxury hotel • meets a pretty, well-dressed young woman in the lobby • has an expensive lunch with the young woman: they drink champagne • goes to a fashion shop: buys an expensive dress for his young friend • returns to his office, but doesn’t do any work • leaves the office, calls a taxi and goes somewhere • comes home late at night

Do Latihan 4–6 to check your understanding of this narration.After that, without looking at the Indonesian-language report on Pak Yusuf’s day, and glancing

only occasionally at the English summary of the day’s events above, look up from the book re-tellin your own (Indonesian) words what Pak Yusuf did in the course of the day.

After this first attempt, read the Indonesian report and the English summary again. Try not tolook at the summary and once more tell the story of Pak Yusuf’s day, improving on your previousattempt. Keep repeating this process until you feel you can produce a narrative that is close to(though not necessarily exactly the same as) the sound file you listened to.

Then flesh out the events of Pak Yusuf’s day with details that you make up yourself. For eachdot point above, it should be possible to add at least one sentence (hopefully more than one) ofextra detail. Make sure your sentences are in good, correct Indonesian, and make them interest-ing.

Lesson 46

Hati-Hati!

The basic meaning of the word waktu is ‘time’:Ada waktu?Do you have time?Maaf, saya tidak ada waktu.Sorry, I don’t have time. Pada waktu itu saya masih di SD.At that time I still went to primary school.

Waktu is also used to narrate events in the past, and translates as “when”: Waktu mereka di restoran, mereka makan kaviar.When they were in the restaurant, they ate caviar.

You need to be aware that waktu is NEVER used to narrate events occurring in the future (aswe will learn in Lesson 48, the word kalau is reserved for this function).

Waktu is also NEVER used an an interrogative! The word kapan is reserved for this function:Kapan dia datang?When will she come?

Perempuan vs. Wanita

Pak Yusuf’s invites his illicit girlfriend to shop at a boutique special-ising in expensive fashionable clothing for women. Women’s clothingis here named as pakaian wanita instead of pakaian perempuan.

Whole articles have been written about the complex relationship ofperempuan versus wanita and laki-laki versus pria. Wanita and pria areloan words from Sanskrit whereas perempuan and laki-laki are originalMalay words. Laki-laki and pria are fully interchangeable and so areperempuan and wanita. Nor is the one used more often than the other.The word wanita is (just like its counterpart pria) supposed to be more elevated and refined, andhence it is widely used in the media and virtually all governmental women organisations use wani-ta rather than perempuan. On the other hand, the word perempuan is far more frequently used inspoken language.

It is interesting to note that governmental organisations make consistent use of wanita andavoid the word perempuan wherever they can, whereas grassroot organisations tend to give pref-erence to perempuan.

Governmental/Military Organisation Grassroot OrganisationDharma Wanita Yayasan Perempuan MardikaPersatuan Wanita Republik Indonesia Asosiasi Perempuan Indonesia untuk Keadilan

Korps Wanita Angkatan Darat Lembaga Studi Pengembangan Perempuan dan Anak

Polisi Wanita Kelompok Perempuan untuk Kebebasan PersLembaga Pemasyarakatan Wanita Solidaritas Perempuan

Lesson 46

But the dichotomy of governmental wanita versus non-governmental perempuan is waning, es-pecially since Indonesia became a democracy in 1998. In 1999, Presiden Abdurahman Wahid es-tablished the “Ministry of Women Empowerment and Child Protection” naming it Kementrian Ne-gara Pemberdayaan Perempuan dan Perlindungan Anak.

Role Play: Ibu Yusuf Quizzes a Private Detective

With a classmate, or with your teacher/tutor, role play a conversation between Ibu Yusuf andthe detektif (private detective). The detective will provide a detailed verbal report describing in fullwhat he or she observed Pak Yusuf doing in the course of the day. Remember, as a professionalthe detective will have to be thorough, accurate and detailed. Report all that Pak Yusuf was ob-served doing and state the time of day that each event happened. The detective’s report shouldbegin early in the morning and describe what Pak Yusuf did right through the day, whether or notthe events are immediately relevant to his supposed misdemeanour.

Ibu Yusuf will interrupt the “report” with numerous questions about the details of her husband’-s day. Here are some of the kinds of question she might ask together with an example of each.You practised the first two question-patterns in the earlier part of this lesson. The others have allappeared in previous lessons.

Apa yang dia / mereka lakukan....?Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja di toko pakaian?Berapa lama dia / mereka .... ?Berapa lama mereka bercakap-cakap di restoran?Di mana dia / mereka ..... ?Di mana mereka bertemu?Ke mana dia / mereka ..... ?Ke mana mereka pergi?Jam berapa dia / mereka .... ?Jam berapa dia (Pak Yusuf) kembali ke kantor?Siapa yang .... ?Siapa yang membeli bunga di toko?Mengapa dia / mereka / Anda .... ?Mengapa dia tidak pulang sesudah bekerja di kantor?Apakah dia / mereka .... ?Di samping minum sampanye, apakah mereka juga tertawa?

Keep the dialogue lively. If your vocabulary is not yet big enough to express all you would liketo say, make maximum use of the words you do know to ensure the conversation doesn’t “die”.Make sure your language is simple and your sentences short. And most important, use your ima-gination to describe in detail the evidence that confirms Ibu Yusuf’s suspicions.

The role play can be varied by having Pak Yusuf investigate his wife’s suspicious activities, orby having a businessman or businesswoman investigate the activities of an associate or compet-itor, or by having Pak Yusuf and Bu Yusuf quiz each other face-to-face etc.

Lesson 46



beberapa o’clock, hour menunggu year

berdiri to, towards, for nanti dulu just a moment

jam apparently sampai di an egg

kapan to stand up sarapan to wait (for)

kepada some, several tahun to arrive in/at

memanggil when? telur to call someone

mencoba breakfast ternyata to try

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan: Berapa lama?

Jodohkan kata atau frase di sebelah kiri dengan terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

1. Selama tiga jam a. For five years 2. Sampai jam dua belas b. Until 4 o’clock3. Selama lima tahun c. Until 20104. Sampai tahun dua ribu sepuluh d. For three hours5. Sampai jam empat e. Until 12 o’clock



1. “How long did they live in Sulawesi?”Berapa—mereka—di—tinggal—lama—Sulawesi?

2. “How long did you work at the office (earlier) today?”Berapa—kantor—lama—bekerja—di—Anda—tadi?

3. “How long did they stroll in the city centre?”Berapa—mereka—di—pusat—berjalan-jalan—lama—kota?

4. “What did Mr Yusuf do?”Apa—oleh—Bapak—yang—dilakukan—Yusuf?

5. “What did they do?”Apa—mereka—yang—lakukan?

Lesson 46

Latihan 4—Jawaban Lengkap

Translate the following questions into good Indonesian. For example: What did she do this morning? You write: Apa yang dia lakukan tadi pagi? or Apa yang dilakukannya tadi pagi?

1. What did Mr Alni do after breakfast?2. What did the woman do at night?3. What did they do after going shopping?4. What did he do last night?5. What did she do before taking a bath?6. What did Mrs. Alni do after watching the movie?7. What did they do after meeting at the restaurant?8. What did Mr Alni do after getting up?9. What did her husband do before buying flowers?

10. What did his wife do at five o’clock in the afternoon?

Latihan 5—Menjodohkan: Pertanyaan dan Jawaban

Jodohkan kedelapan pertanyaan di Rekaman 046-02 dengan jawabannya di sebelahkanan.—Sound file 046-02 contains eight questions. Match them with the answers inthe right column.

1. a. Karena dia mau bertemu dengan seseorang di restoran. 2. b. Tadi malam ia pergi ke gedung olahraga.3. c. Pak Alni yang membeli bunga itu.4. d. Mereka pergi ke bioskop sesudah berbelanja.5. e. Dia berjalan-jalan di sekeliling rumahnya pada sore hari.6. f. Ya, mereka juga makan dan bercakap-cakap.7. g. Ia pergi ke sekolah tadi pagi.8. h. Pak Yusuf pergi ke kantor sesudah makan pagi.

Latihan 6—Put in Order

Refer to the reading text “Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance” and number the events in order of how they appear in the passage.

a. ____ works at the office for two hoursb. _1__ gets up early in the morningc. ____ has breakfast while listening to the radiod. ____ meets a pretty, well-dressed young woman in the lobbye. ____ goes to the office by car

Lesson 46

f. ____ has a bath etc. and gets dressedg. ____ goes to a flower shop and buys flowersh. ____ has an expensive lunch with the young woman: they drink champagnei. ____ sits in the garden reading a newspaper and drinking coffeej. ____ goes to a fashion shop: buys an expensive dress for his young friendk. ____ leaves the office and walks to a liquor shop: buys a bottle of winel. ____ returns to his office, but doesn’t do any workm. ____ leaves the office, calls a taxi and goes somewheren. ____ comes home late at nighto. ____ calls a taxi and goes to a luxury hotel

Latihan 7—Menjodohkan: Vocabulary


lobi hour akhirnya happy, enjoyoleh rose telur to payberapa lama to choose membayar includingjam by di antaranya eggmasakan lobby senang to kissmawar how long waktu finallyseorang cooked food mencium whilememilih luxurious pipi time, whenmewah a person sambil cheeks

Latihan 8—Isian: Pak Yusuf Under Surveillance

Dengarkanlah Rekaman 046-01 ini dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini.

Kemarin pagi Pak Yusuf bangun jam enam. Sesudah bangun dia duduk di kebundi belakang rumahnya selama kira-kira satu jam. Di sana dia minum kopi dan __________

surat kabar. Jam tujuh pagi ia masuk ke rumah untuk mandi, __________ gigi dan bersi-sir. Pak Yusuf __________ di kamar tidur. Lalu dia sarapan di ruang makan. Pak Yusuf

makan roti dengan telur dan minum kopi manis. Sambil makan dia juga __________ mu-sik di radio. Lalu dia __________ komputer untuk membaca berita. Kira-kira jam delapan

dia naik mobil ke kantor. Dia sampai di kantor jam sembilan kurang seperempat.

Pak Yusuf __________ di kantor selama dua jam. Kira-kira jam sebelas siang ia kelu-ar dari kantornya dan __________ kaki ke toko makanan. Di toko itu ia membeli sebotol

anggur yang mahal sekali. Lalu ia berjalan ke toko bunga. Di toko bunga dia __________

Lesson 46

bunga mawar yang merah dan putih. Kemudian Pak Yusuf __________ taksi. Ia naik taksi

ke Hotel Sheraton ‒ hotel mewah yang tidak jauh dari pusat kota. Ia masuk ke hotel dan duduk di lobi.

Jam dua belas siang seorang perempuan datang. Dia cantik sekali dan masih

muda. Umurnya kira-kira sembilan belas tahun. Ia __________ pakaian yang mewah. Ia duduk di samping Pak Yusuf. Pak Yusuf __________ bunga mawar kepada perempuan

itu. Mereka __________ selama setengah jam.

Lalu mereka __________ di restoran. Restoran di Sheraton itu mewah dan __________. Masakannya masakan Prancis! Mereka makan roti dengan telur kaviar. Pak

Yusuf membuka botol yang dibelinya. Ternyata bukan anggur tetapi sampanye! Selama satu jam mereka makan dan __________, tertawa sambil minum sampanye. Pak Yusuf

__________ __________ sekali.

Kira-kira jam setengah dua mereka __________ dari restoran. Di Hotel Sheraton ada __________ toko, di antaranya toko pakaian wanita. Mereka kira-kira satu jam di toko itu.

Perempuan yang cantik itu __________ beberapa baju yang __________ dan mahal. Akhirnya dia __________ baju bagus dari Italia. Pak Yusuf yang __________. Pada waktu

mereka keluar dari toko perempuan itu __________ pipi Pak Yusuf.

Sesudah itu Pak Yusuf __________ ke kantornya. Tetapi ia tidak __________. Ia ha-nya duduk saja di mejanya dan melihat ke luar jendela. Kira-kira jam setengah enam ia

__________ dan __________ ke luar. Ia __________ taksi, tetapi saya tidak tahu ke mana ia pergi. Pak Yusuf __________ ke rumahnya kira-kira jam sebelas malam. __________

mandi ia tidur.

Lesson 46


Mendatar:1. some; several3. a; one (person)5. finally; in the end6. to kiss, smell, sniff8. to choose11. while16. happy; to like sth.17. to try (to do sth.)18. to pay19. cheeksMenurun:1. to stand; to stand up2. when; at the time

when4. a private detective7. to wait (for)8. a rose9. cooked food10. by12. breakfast13. luxurious14. lobby (of a hotel)15. hour

Lesson 46

Lesson 47

During and After the Muslim Fast

Aims

• To practise talking about daily routine with focus on the Fast and Idul Fitri.

Vocabulary Review


bersiap-siap to get ready menurut according to, sayskue cake penting importantmembeli to buy something sambil whilememperbaiki to repair sth broken sembahyang to praymencoba to try to do something tertawa to laugh menunggu to wait for s.o. or sth. lantai floor

Ramadhan—The Holiest Month for Muslims

By most counts almost 90% of Indonesians are Muslims. Thisadds up to over 200 million people making Indonesia the largestMuslim country in the world. Probably the most important religiousevent for this huge community is the annual Bulan Puasa (FastingMonth) in the Muslim month of Ramadhan. During RamadhanMuslims are required to abstain from food and drink (and other indul-gences like cigarettes and sex) during daylight hours. It is – or shouldbe – a time of special piety. People strive in a more focussed way toimplement the teachings of Islam. They recite and study the Qur’an.They assemble for special prayers. They try to create an atmosphereof Islamic order and community. In many places schools close andoffices reduce their workload so that staff can more fully meet the

demands of the Fast.During Ramadhan people have to get up very early to have breakfast before dawn. This early

breakfast is called sahur. After a long, often very trying, day in the tropical heat without eating ordrinking, at nightfall people break their fast. This is called buka puasa, and often simply buka orberbuka. In households, neighbourhoods, work places and mosques across Indonesia, Muslimsassemble to pray, hear verses from the Qur’an and perhaps listen to good advice on how to un-derstand Islam better and live a more fully Islamic life. As the sky darkens people sip a drink to

Ketupat (Shutterstock)

47

Lesson 47

break their fast, then eat in groups with family, neighbours, friends and work colleagues. Familiesand communities – even very poor people – strive to prepare special foods for the buka puasameal. It is a memorable time, a time when people try to put the highest ideals of Islam at the fore-front of daily living.

The end of the Fast is celebrated in a festival called Idul Fitri (a variant of the Arabic ʻĪd al-Fiṭr –in English sometimes rendered as "Eid al-Fitr"). Many Javanese people call the celebration Le-baran which means something like “the time after the fast is over”. Many millions of those who livein big cities head back to their home villages (known as mudik or pulang kampung) to celebratewith their families. For two weeks it seems the whole country is on the move. Roads are clogged,inter-city traffic slows to a crawl, trains and buses are jam-packed, air bookings are impossible toget. City people on their way to their ancestral homes in the countryside are weighed down withfood, new clothes and oleh-oleh gifts for family and neighbours.

In the nation’s villages, as people await family from the city, houses are spruced up and yardsswept clean. Beds and sleeping platforms are rearranged to accommodate the influx, and myster-ious presents lie wrapped and stacked in cupboards. Tables groan under the burden of bottleddrinks and packets of biscuits. Special cakes and savouries are cooked. Almost synonymous withIdul Fitri are the rice dumplings called ketupat (see picture). Rice is wrapped in small cube-likepackets woven from coconut leaves or palm-tree fronds. These are boiled, and individual grainsdisappear as the cooked rice expands to tightly fill its leaf casing. The dense lumps of rice areeaten with rendang (beef chunks cooked until dry in a spicy sauce with coconut) or gulai ayam(spicy chicken stew).

At sunset on the last day of the Fast exuberant celebrations break out. Mosques are packed.Through the night there are prayers of thanksgiving. Many people gather to chant devotionalphrases over and over in Arabic, like Allahu akbar (God is great) and La illaha ilallah (There is nogod but God). People walk the streets in groups, or crisscross their neighbourhoods on the backsof trucks, chanting these phrases in chorus, very often to the accompaniment of noisy displays offireworks.

In the quiet of the following morning many people attend mass morning prayers. They put ontheir very best clothes, usually brand new. Men greet one another with a handshake and the Arab-ic phrase Assalam alaikum (Peace be upon you) to which the answer is Wa alaikum as-salam (Andpeace be upon you too). This is followed by Selamat Hari Raya (Happy Feast Day). Women greetone another with a traditional cium (cheek pressed against cheek, right and left, accompanied bya sniff). Back home children greet their parents and grandparents with special displays of gratit-ude and respect. Children (including the adult children of elderly parents) kneel before their seatedparents, place their head on their parents’ lap or kiss their parents’ hands and ask for their bless-ings. The mother and father will place their hands on their children, kiss them and murmur wordsof love and encouragement. It is a moment of great tenderness. Occasionally it is very emotional.

Some people go to family graves, tidy them up and pray for the repose of the dead. Peoplealso try to “make a new start” with family, friends, neighbours and work colleagues by sayingSaya minta maaf lahir dan batin, very often shortened to Maaf lahir batin. This means literally “I askfor forgiveness outwardly and inwardly”, although this is the most minimal of translations. Morefully the sentence might be rendered “If I have given you any offence, please forgive me, not justas a matter of polite etiquette, but from the heart... and I too plead for your forgiveness not just asan outward gesture, but from the bottom of my heart.”

Then everyone sets off to visit relatives, neighbours and friends. The ritual of making and re-ceiving visits, serving drinks and special foods, catching up on personal news, and of course,asking for forgiveness lahir dan batin is repeated a thousand times in the two days of the Idul Fitriholiday. It is a very special time for children. Decked out in their new clothes, and often with new

Lesson 47

toys, children gambol around their parents and stuff themselves with the special goodies of HariRaya. As always in Indonesia (or almost always), children are treated with remarkable public affec-tion and tolerance.

Test Yourself: Ramadhan – The Holiest Month for Muslims

Refer to the text above to answer the following questions.

1. What is the largest Muslim country in the world?a. Egypt b. Saudi Arabia c. Indonesia d. Bangladesh

2. What is the early breakfast the people have during Ramadhan called?a. makan pagi b. sahur c. puasa d. buka

3. What is it called when people break fast at nightfall?a. buka puasa b. buka makan c. sahur d. puasa

4. What is the name of the festival celebrated at the end of the Fast?a. puasa b. buka puasa c. Idul Fitri d. sahur

5. What is the name for the small gifts when one has returned home?a. oleh-oleh b. makanan c. puasa d. kampung

6. What is the name of the rice dumplings synonymous with Idul Fitri?a. oleh-oleh b. makanan c. ketupat d. rendang

7. What are ketupat often eaten with?a. makanan b. air putih c. rendang d. oleh-oleh

8. What is the Indonesian phrase for “Happy Feast Day”?a. Selamat Buka Puasa. b. Selamat Ramadhan. c. Selamat Hari Raya. d. Selamat Makan.

Lesson 47

9. What is one way to ask for forgiveness and to “start fresh” during Idul Fitri?a. Saya orang yang baik b. Saya suka Anda c. Saya sayang Anda d. Saya minta maaf lahir dan batin

10.What is the shortened form of Saya minta maaf lahir dan batin?a. Saya lahir batin b. Saya maaf batin c. Maaf lahir batin d. Minta maaf lahir

Celebrating the End of the Fast

Here is an account of how an average family observes the Muslim Fast and celebrates its endby returning to their home village at Idul Fitri. Most words in the narrative have appeared in previ-ous lessons, so you should recognise them and be able to read the narrative reasonably fluently.But there are a number of new high-frequency words like setiap (each, every), menurut (accordingto), haus (thirsty) and several more. In addition there are a number of new words that are not sofrequent in general conversation, but are very frequent when you are talking about Islam, andabout the annual Fast in particular. Here is a list of these more “specialised” terms. Study themfirst before you start reading. (They are also in the vocabulary cards for this lesson.)

Allah GodAllahu Akbar God is greatayat a verse (from a holy book)beragama ... to be a follower of such-and-such a religion, thus beragama Islam a

Muslim, a follower of Islam, adhering to Islamberbuka puasa (also: buka puasa) to have a meal at the end of a day’s fastingberpuasa to fastbersyukur to thank Godbulan puasa the fasting monthdoa a prayer (usually a personal, meditative prayer)Hari Raya an Islamic feast dayIdul Fitri the (usually) two days of celebrations and festivities at the end of the

fasting month of Ramadhanketupat dense lumps of rice cooked in packets woven from leaves and served at

meals during Idul Fitrilahir dan batin outwardly and inwardlyLebaran the Javanese term for Idul Fitri, the celebration at the end of the annual

Fastmohon maaf lahir danbatin

to ask for forgiveness. This phrase is only used during the Idul Fitri celebrations. In this particular phrase mohon maaf is always used insteadof minta maaf

mudik to go back to one’s hometown (to celebrate Idul Fitri). nabi a prophetNabi Muhammad the prophet Muhammad

Lesson 47

naik haji to make the pilgrimage to the Islamic holy land centred on Mecca in modern Saudi Arabia

puasa a fast, the Muslim Fastsahur to have a meal before sunrise during the fasting monthtakbiran to chant Allahu Akbar! (God is great!) over and overulama a pious and learned Muslim

Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran

Listen to Sound File 047-01 and read the transcription about Mr. Ridwan’s familycelebrating Aidl Fitr. After that, check your understanding by doing Latihan 4 and 5.

apak Ridwan dan Ibu Hami-dah berasal dari Kebumen di

Jawa Tengah, tetapi sekarang me-reka tinggal di Jakarta. KeluargaBapak Ridwan beragama Islam.Selama bulan Ramadan orang Is-lam harus berpuasa dari pagi sam-pai sore. Mereka hanya makan duakali sehari. Setiap hari Bapak Rid-wan dan Ibu Hamidah harus ba-ngun pagi-pagi untuk sahur. Sesu-dah itu mereka mandi dan bersem-bahyang subuh. Lalu mereka bersi-ap-siap berangkat ke tempat kerja. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik perabot dan Ibu Hami-dah berdagang batik di pasar.

B

Kira-kira jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat. Ibu Hamidah biasa-nya pulang pada pukul empat sore dan menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka puasa. Kira--kira jam enam sore Bapak Ridwan sampai di rumah. Karena berpuasa mereka tidak hanyalapar dan haus, tetapi juga capai sekali. Sekitar jam setengah tujuh malam, saat hari mulaigelap, mereka berbuka. Biasanya mereka berbuka dengan minuman dan makanan yang ma-nis sambil duduk di lantai.“Hari Raya Idul Fitri nanti, apakah kita akan mudik ke Kebumen, Pak?” tanya Ibu Hami-dah.“Iya, seperti biasanya kita akan mudik Lebaran,” jawab Bapak Ridwan. “Ibu dan bapak pas-ti menunggu kita. Mereka sudah tua. Selama satu tahun mereka tidak bertemu dengankita.” Menurut Bapak Ridwan, berkumpul di rumah orang tua saat Lebaran penting sekali.Dua hari sebelum Idul Fitri keluarga Ridwan berangkat ke stasiun kereta Jatinegara dari ru-mah mereka. Stasiun Jatinegara sangat ramai karena banyak orang yang mau pulang kam-pung. Semua orang membawa bermacam-macam barang untuk oleh-oleh. Perjalanan sela-ma sebelas jam membuat mereka capai.Sebelum Bapak Ridwan datang, orang tuanya sudah bersiap-siap. Ayah Bapak Ridwan, Ba-pak Subarkat, memperbaiki pagar dan atap rumah. Ibu Bapak Ridwan membersihkan ru-mah dan masak. Dia membuat bermacam-macam masakan Idul Fitri, di antaranya ketupat

Lesson 47

dan rendang. Mereka juga membeli baju baru untuk anak-anak, dan banyak minuman.Orang tua Bapak Ridwan senang sekali karena keluarga mereka dapat berkumpul.Seperti biasa, malam sebelum Hari Raya Bapak Ridwan dan Bapak Subarkat ikut takbiran.Bapak Subarkat memimpin orang sekampung untuk berkeliling desa pada malam hari Le-baran. Besoknya semua bangun pagi-pagi untuk sembahyang Idul Fitri. Semua berdoa ke-pada Allah karena mereka dapat berpuasa dengan baik selama satu bulan. Sesudah kembali ke rumah Bapak Ridwan sekeluarga memohon maaf kepada orang tuanya.Besoknya Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya berkunjung ke rumah teman-temannya. Merekamakan, minum, bercakap-cakap, tertawa dan mengucapkan “Selamat Hari Raya. Mohonmaaf lahir dan batin.” Anak-anak kecil juga senang. Mereka bisa bermain dengan teman-te-man. Di mana-mana orang bersalaman mohon maaf dengan mengucapkan “Selamat HariRaya. Mohon maaf lahir dan batin.”

Exercise 47-01

The statements in this exercise are based on the narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran buteach of them is wrong. None of them fits exactly with the narrative you have read. Write a re-sponse to each of the incorrect statements. Begin with the phrase Maaf, saya kira... and statewhat the correct statement should be based on the narrative. Feel free to copy words andphrases from the narrative to complete your response. Study this example first.

Wrong statement: Bapak Ridwan sekarang tinggal di Kebumen.You write: Maaf, saya kira Bapak Ridwan berasal dari Kebumen, tetapi sekarang tinggal di Jakarta.

1. Bapak Ridwan berasal dari Padang di Sumatra.2. Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat ke tempat kerja jam setengah delapan pagi.3. Setiap malam keluarga Bapak Ridwan berbuka puasa di rumah makan.4. Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya naik pesawat terbang ke Kebumen.5. Bapak Subarkat masih muda, umurnya kira-kira tiga puluh tahun.6. Ayah Bapak Ridwan pandai masak. Dia membuat kue.7. Bapak Subarkat membuat ketupat dan rendang.8. Sesudah kembali ke rumah Bapak Ridwan sekeluarga memohon maaf kepada temannya.9. Anak-anak kecil juga senang karena bisa belajar di sekolah.

Exercise 47-02

Answer these questions using the data given in the narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran. Make sure you choose the right negator!

1. Apakah Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah menengah?A. Bukan. Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di pasar.B. Bukan. Ibu Hamidah guru sekolah dasar.C. Tidak. Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di sekolah.D. Tidak. Ibu Hamidah bekerja di pabrik perabot.

2. Apakah Bapak Ridwan bekerja di kantor pemerintah?A. Tidak. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di toko buku.B. Tidak. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik perabot.

Lesson 47

C. Bukan. Bapak Ridwan berdagang batik di pasar.D. Bukan. Bapak Ridwan itu berdagang buah di pasar.

3. Apakah Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah sahur sesudah jam lima pagi?A. Bukan. Mereka sahur pada jam tiga pagi.B. Tidak. Mereka sahur sebelum jam lima pagi.C. Bapak Subarkat berasal dari Bali.

4. Apakah dia beragama Hindu?A. Bukan. Ia beragama Islam.B. Tidak. Ia beragama Islam.

5. Apakah Bapak Ridwan berbicara tentang olahraga pada waktu berbuka puasa?A. Tidak. Ia tidak berbicara tentang olahraga.B. Bukan. Ia bukan berbicara tentang olahraga.

6. Apakah rumah orang tua Bapak Ridwan di Re-jomulyo itu baru?A. Tidak. Rumahnya lama.B. Bukan. Rumahnya lama.

7. Apakah Bapak Ridwan pegawai pemerintah?A. Tidak. Ia seorang pengusaha.B. Tidak. Ia seorang pedagang perabot.C. Bukan. Ia seorang pegawai pabrik perabot.

8. Apakah ayah Bapak Ridwan punya anjing?A. Tidak. Ia tidak punya anjing.B. Bukan. Ia bukan punya anjing.

9. Apakah Fatimah itu laki-laki?A. Tidak. Fatimah tidak laki-laki.B. Bukan. Fatimah bukan laki-laki.

10. Apakah anak-anak kecil hanya bermain di da-lam rumah saja?A. Tidak. Mereka juga bermain di rumah te-

man-temannya.B. Bukan. Mereka juga bermain di rumah te-

man-temannya.

Retelling the Narrative of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran

The narrative Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran brings together most of the themes, vocabularyand grammar that you have practised in Module 3 and also recycles much of what you studied inprevious modules. Here is a list of the most important of these elements.

➢ personal details (place of origin, age, marital status, work and study) ➢ place of residence (components of house and garden) ➢ family and kinship ➢ daily routine (including time of day at which events happen) ➢ vehicles and travel ➢ food and drink

Lesson 47

➢ shopping ➢ me- verbs (like memilih, membaca, menulis etc.) ➢ the events and vocabulary of the Muslim Fast and Idul Fitri

Using these resources you can take the story of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran as a kind ofbeginning point and re-tell it – with changes – in your own words. Sticking (in broad terms) withthe events and vocabulary of Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran, change the names and character-istics of people and places. For example, you can compile a narrative about bulan puasa andmudik Lebaran involving, say, Umi, a 19 year old shop assistant. Here are Umi’s details:

Nama: UmiKeterangan diri: perempuan berumur 19 tahun, belum kawinAgama: beragama IslamAlamat: Wonokromo di kota SurabayaTempat kerja: Toko pakaian Busana Baru di pusat kota SurabayaAyah: Abdullah Sayuti, berumur 45 tahun, bekerja di kantor pemerintahIbu: Siti Maryam, berumur 40 tahun, tukang masak restoranAdik: Nur, perempuan, berumur 15 tahun, bersekolah di kelas 3 sekolah menengah pertamaRumah kakek & nenek: di desa Kemiri, 60 kilometer dari Malang, Jawa TimurKendaraan: punya sepeda motor kecilMakanan: suka ikan gorengetc. etc.

With these basic details, and making creative use of the descriptions and events in KeluargaRidwan Mudik Lebaran, construct your own extended narrative describing what Umi and her fam-ily do during the Fast and when they pulang kampung to her grandparents’ home in Kemiri at IdulFitri. Make your narrative as detailed as you can with as many digressions as your current com-mand of Indonesian permits you to make. Make liberal use of phrases and vocabulary from Kelu-arga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran but feel free to change details or add new events and people. With afellow student, or with your tutor/instructor, ask and answer questions about the narrative, per-haps taking the questions in Exercise 47-02 as your beginning point. Repeat your narrative overand over, each time adding or changing details, improving correctness, responding better toquestions and smoothing out your fluency. When you can do this well, put yourself in Umi’s place,turning your narrative into a first-person account using saya and kami.



bersiap-siap to repair sth menunggu whilekue to buy sth penting to laughmembeli cake sambil to wait (for)memperbaiki to try to do sth tertawa floormencoba to get ready lantai important

Lesson 47

Latihan 2—Menjodohkan: Terms of Ramadhan


1. Allah a. to fast 2. Allahu Akbar b. to break the fast3. beragama c. thirsty4. berbuka puasa d. God (used by Christians and Muslims alike)5. berpuasa e. God is great (used by Muslims only)6. bulan puasa f. times, a time7. Idul Fitri g. the Eid al-Fitr holiday at end of Ramadhan8. puasa h. the fasting month9. gelap i. dark

10. haus j. hungry11. kali k. a fast12. lapar l. to lead13. libur m. to be a follower of such-and-such a religion14. memimpin n. to ask for forgiveness15. mengucapkan o. a present brought back for family or friends16. minta maaf p. to say something, to utter something17. oleh-oleh q. a holiday, a day off

Latihan 3—Isian: Keluarga Ridwan Mudik Lebaran

Dengarkanlah Rekaman 047-01 dan lengkapilah bacaan di bawah ini.

Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah __________ dari Kebumen di Jawa Tengah, tetapisekarang mereka tinggal di Jakarta. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan beragama Islam. Selama

bulan Ramadan orang Islam harus __________ dari pagi sampai sore. Mereka hanya ma-kan dua kali __________. Setiap hari Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah harus bangun pa-

gi-pagi __________ sahur. Sesudah itu mereka mandi dan __________ subuh. Lalu mere-ka bersiap-siap berangkat ke __________ kerja. Bapak Ridwan bekerja di pabrik

__________ dan Ibu Hamidah berdagang batik di pasar.

__________ jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat. Ibu Hamidah biasanya pulang pada pukul empat sore dan menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka pua-

sa. Kira-kira jam enam sore Bapak Ridwan sampai di rumah. Karena berpuasa mereka tidak hanya __________ dan haus, tetapi juga __________ sekali. Sekitar jam setengah tu-

Lesson 47

juh malam, saat hari mulai __________, mereka berbuka puasa. Biasanya mereka berbu-ka dengan minuman dan makanan yang __________ sambil duduk di lantai.

‘Hari Raya Idul Fitri nanti, apakah kita akan __________ ke Kebumen, Pak?’ tanya Ibu

Hamidah.

‘Iya, seperti biasanya kita akan mudik Lebaran,’ jawab Bapak Ridwan. ‘Ibu dan ba-pak pasti menunggu kita. Mereka sudah tua. Selama satu tahun mereka tidak bertemu

dengan kita.’ Menurut Bapak Ridwan, berkumpul di rumah orang tua __________ Leba-ran penting sekali.

Dua hari sebelum Idul Fitri keluarga Ridwan berangkat ke stasiun kereta Jatinegara

dari rumah mereka. Stasiun Jatinegara sangat __________ karena banyak orang yang mau pulang kampung. Semua orang membawa __________ barang untuk oleh-oleh. Per-

jalanan selama sebelas jam membuat mereka capai.

Sebelum Bapak Ridwan datang, orang tuanya sudah bersiap-siap. Ayah Bapak Rid-wan, Bapak Subarkat, __________ pagar dan atap rumah. Ibu Bapak Ridwan __________

rumah dan masak. Dia membuat bermacam-macam masakan Idul Fitri, di antaranya ke-tupat dan rendang. Mereka juga membeli baju baru untuk anak-anak, dan banyak mi-

numan. Orang tua Bapak Ridwan senang __________ karena keluarga mereka dapat __________.

Seperti biasa, malam sebelum Hari Raya Bapak Ridwan dan Bapak Subarkat ikut

takbiran. Bapak Subarkat __________ orang sekampung untuk berkeliling desa pada ma-lam hari Lebaran. Besoknya semua bangun pagi-pagi untuk sembahyang Idul Fitri. Se-

mua berdoa kepada __________ karena mereka dapat berpuasa dengan baik selama satu bulan.

Sesudah kembali ke rumah Bapak Ridwan sekeluarga memohon __________ kepada

orang tuanya. Besoknya Bapak Ridwan dan keluarganya berkunjung ke rumah teman-te-mannya. Mereka makan, minum, bercakap-cakap, __________ dan mengucapkan ‘Sela-

mat Hari Raya. __________ maaf lahir dan batin.’ Anak-anak kecil juga senang. Mereka bisa __________ dengan teman-teman. Di mana-mana orang bersalaman mohon maaf

dengan mengucapkan ‘Selamat Hari Raya. Mohon maaf lahir dan batin.’

Lesson 47

Latihan 4—Pemahaman (1)

Jawablah pertanyaan-pertanyaan di bawah ini.

1. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan berasal dari... A. JakartaB. Jawa TimurC. Jawa TengahD. Yogyakarta

2. Apa pekerjaan Bapak Ridwan?A. Berdagang perabotB. Pegawai pabrik perabotC. Berdagang batikD. Pegawai toko batik

3. Siapa yang menyiapkan makanan untuk berbuka puasa? .......................................

4. Pak Ridwan dan Bu Hamidah biasanya berbuka puasa sambil duduk di...A. kursiB. lantaiC. sofaD. halaman

5. Mereka naik apa ke Kebumen? ................................................................................

6. Apa yang dibawa orang pada saat mudik? .............................................................

7. Berapa lama perjalanan dari Jakarta ke Kebumen? ..............................................

8. Kapan mereka takbiran?A. Sebelum berbuka puasaB. Sesudah sembahyang subuhC. Pada malam hari sebelum Idul FitriD. Pagi-pagi sebelum sembahyang subuh

9. Siapa yang memimpin orang berkeliling desa pada malam Lebaran?A. Bapak RidwanB. Ibu HamidahC. Bapak SubarkatD. Teman Bapak Ridwan

10. Apa yang diucapkan orang pada saat Lebaran? ....................................................

Lesson 47

Latihan 5—Pemahaman (2)

Benar atau Salah?

1. Mereka makan tiga kali sehari selama bulan Ramadan.A. BenarB. Salah

2. Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah libur selama bulan Ramadan.A. BenarB. Salah

3. Satu jam sesudah Ibu Hamidah pulang, Pak Ridwan pulang.A. BenarB. Salah

4. Keluarga Bapak Ridwan berbuka puasa kira-kira jam setengah tujuh malam.A. BenarB. Salah

5. Biasanya mereka berbuka dengan makanan manis.A. BenarB. Salah

6. Mereka ke rumah orang tuanya naik kereta api.A. BenarB. Salah

7. Ada banyak makanan di rumah orang tua Bapak Ridwan saat Lebaran.A. BenarB. Salah

8. Ibu Hamidah masak banyak sekali untuk Lebaran.A. BenarB. Salah

9. Pada Hari Raya Idul Fitri, mereka bisa bangun siang.A. BenarB. Salah

10. Besoknya, sesudah Hari Raya Idul Fitri, Bapak Ridwan hanya tinggal di rumah untuk ma-kan dan minum bersama keluarga.A. BenarB. Salah

Lesson 47



1. “Mr. Ridwan’s family are followers of Islam.”Keluarga—Ridwan—Bapak—beragama—Islam.

2. “The fasting month is very important for all Muslims.”Bulan—semua—penting—sekali—puasa—untuk—orang—Islam.

3. “At around 6:00 Mr. Ridwan and Mrs. Hamidah depart to their work place.”Kira-kira—Ibu Hamidah—berangkat—dan—Bapak Ridwan—ke—pagi—tempat—jam enam—kerja.

4. “But they cannot eat or drink during the daytime.”Tetapi—pada—makan—tidak—dan—minum—boleh—mereka—siang hari.

5. “They are all hungry and thirsty.”Mereka—dan—semua—lapar—haus.


Dengarkanlah Rekaman 047-02 dan pilihlah terjemahannya di sebelah kanan.

1. a. Is Fatimah a boy?2. b. Mr Subarkat comes from Bali. Is he a Hindu?3. c. Does Mr Ridwan work in a government office?4. d. Is Mrs Hamidah a high school teacher?5. e. Do Mr Ridwan and Mrs Hamidah have a pre-dawn meal after

5:00?6. f. Is Kiai Haji Ahmad Abdulah a government official?7. g. Did the director of the factory talk about sports when breaking

his fast?8. h. Is the house of Mr Ridwan’s parents new?9. i. Do the children only play in the house?

10. j. Does Mr Ridwan’s father have a dog?

Lesson 47


Jodohkanlah pertanyaan di kolom kiri dengan jawaban yang tepat.

1. Apakah Sri guru sekolah dasar? a. Bukan, dia berdagang batik di pasar.

2. Apakah kamu bekerja di kantor pemerintah?

b. Bukan, dia perempuan.

3. Apakah mobil itu mahal? c. Tidak, mereka juga bermain di halaman.

4. Apakah Wahid beragama Hindu? d. Tidak, rumah saya sudah lebih dari sepuluh tahun.

5. Apakah Pak Amir berbicara ten-tang olahraga?

e. Bukan, dia bukan pegawai peme-rintah.

6. Apakah rumah Anda baru? f. Tidak, harganya murah.7. Apakah Bu Mita pegawai peme-

rintah?g. Tidak, dia hanya memelihara bu-

rung.8. Apakah Santi punya anjing? h. Tidak, dia berbicara tentang poli-

tik.9. Apakah Fatimah laki-laki? i. Tidak, dia beragama Islam.

10. Apakah anak-anak kecil hanya bermain di dalam rumah saja?

j. Tidak, saya bekerja di pabrik.

Lesson 47

Latihan 9—Teka Teki SilangMendatar:4. to laugh6. a prophet8. another name for Idul Fitri9. to visit one’s home town15. to have such-and-such a

religion16. the Hajj (pilgrimage to Mecca)17. important18. to fastMenurun:1. to buy2. to wait (for)3. to repair something5. God7. to try to do something10. a prayer11. the fast12. each, every13. pre-sunrise breakfast14. cake

Selamat

Congratulations! You successfully completed Module 3. Keep up the good work and please donot forget to download Anki at http://ankisrs.net/ and to load the Anki decks for Modules 1 to 3into the Anki application.

Support Us

«The Indonesian Way» is free and will always remain free. In order to further develop TIW, weare dependent on the support of the user community.

Our plans for the future encompass:1) Developing iOS and Android applications2) Replacing the online “Latihan” using technology that is not dependent on Flash.3) Adding another Module consisting of 12 more lessons

This can only be accomplished with your assistance. If, after completing each Module, all ourusers would donate $5 or $10, our goal could be accomplished in a short time.

To make a donation please go to http://indonesianway.com/donations/For more learning resources, check out «Indonesian Online» at http://indonesian-online.com. Terima kasih, Mahalo, Thank you

Wordlist

Wordlist for Module 3

Lesson 32

berangkat (•angkat); Aduh! Sudah berangkat!

to depart, to set off (to go somewhere), to leave (on a trip); Oh no! It’s left already!

berkunjung (•kunjung); berkunjung ke Glasgow

to visit (a place); to visit Glasgow

jam; jam dua belas lewat dua puluh o’clock [a marker word used to express the time of day in hoursand minutes]; twenty past twelve

kurang; jam delapan kurang seperempat

to (i.e. “before the hour” or “before the half-hour”, when telling the time); a quarter to eight.

léwat; pukul satu lewat lima more, past (when telling the time); five past onemakan siang to have lunchmakan malam to have dinnerperusahaan (•usaha); perusahaan asing

a company, a business enterprise; a foreign company

pukul; pukul satu o’clock [a marker word used to express the time of day in hoursand minutes]; one o’clock

sampai until (a certain time), as far as (a certain place)sarapan to have breakfastseperempat; dua seperempat ¼ (a quarter); 2¼ (two and a quarter)setengah; satu setengah ½ (a half); 1½ (one and a half)tengah malam at midnight, in the middle of the nighttertawa (•tawa) to laugh

Lesson 33

apaan (•apa); Orang apaan, tuh? J (Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) what kind of... [adding a note of humorous scepticism or cynicism to a question, especially a rhetorical question]; What kinda person isthat?

banget; Cakep banget dia. J (Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) very, really; She’s really spunky.

bérés; Beres. Tunggu aja sebentar. fixed up, put right, all okay, resolved, no worries; No worries. Just hang on a sec.

berlari (•lari) to rundoyan; Nggak mau, aku nggak doyan. J (Only used in informal speech Jakarta style) to like (especially

food); I don’t want any. I don’t like it!ikut kuliah to attend a lecture, to go to a lecture

Wordlist

jam berapa?; Jam berapa sekarang? what time?; What time is it now?kalo; kalo aku nggak mau. J (Only used in informal speech. In formal Indonesian use kalau)

if, as for (me/him/that etc.), as far as ... is concerned; Speaking for myself, I don’t want to.

keliling aroundketemu (•temu) J (informal for bertemu) to meet, to findlapangan (•lapang); lapangan sepak bola

a field, a ground, an open space (especially for recreation); a football field

lebih suka; Saya lebih suka berjalan kaki.

to prefer, to like something better; I prefer to walk.

lumayan; Hmm ... masakanmu lumayan.

J not bad, quite good; Hmmm... your cooking’s not bad.

nanti siang this afternoon (spoken in the morning)nanti soré late this afternoon (spoken earlier in the day)nanti malam tonight (spoken earlier in the day)paké; Pake bus apa taksi? J (Only used in informal speech) by (a certain mode of transport);

(Shall we go) by bus or taxi?pulang to come home, to go homepunya; Aku udah ketemu ama dia punya ibu.

J [a slangy word used to express possession]; I’ve met with his/her mother.

sih; Gimana sih, kamu! J [a slangy particle that adds emphasis and colour to a question, often making the question feel more pointed, even adding a note of irritation, bewilderment, surprise, puzzlement or sarcasm.]; What is it with you!?

tentu saja of courseyuk; Minum yuk! J c’mon, let’s...; Let’s have something to drink!

Lesson 34

hari a daykadang-kadang sometimes, occasionally, from time to timemusik music(pada) pagi hari in the morning(s)(pada) siang hari in the afternoon(s)(pada) soré hari in the late afternoon(s)(pada) malam hari at nightsalah; Maaf, saya kira Anda salah. wrong, to be wrong; Sorry, I think you’re wrong.sesudah (•sudah) afterténis; bermain tenis tennis; to play tennis

Lesson 35

acara; Ada acara apa nanti malam? a television/radio program, something you plan to do, a commitment to go somewhere; What are you planning to do tonight?

Wordlist

apalagi; tidak banyak bus, apalagi hariMinggu.

particularly, the more so, especially; There aren’t many buses, especially on a Sunday.

apartemén an apartment, a flat, a unitbadminton badminton; also bulu tangkisberenang (•renang) to swim, to go swimmingberistirahat (•istirahat) to rest, to take a rest, to take a breakbersembahyang (•sembahyang) to say/do your prayers, to worshipbersenam (•senam) to do gymnastic, to do aerobics, to work outcuma; cuma satu sudah cukup. J (Colloquial for hanya) just, only; Just one will do.émangnya kenapa? J (Colloquial) why? (what’s it to you), why? (why do you ask?)kalian J (Colloquial) you (plural of kamu)kegiatan (•giat) an activitykolam renang a swimming poolmelakukan (•laku) to do (something), to undertake (something); dilakukan be donelalu then; and solari pagi early morning jogginglu; Lu mau makan nggak? J you (Jakarta slang); Would you like something to eat?makasih; Makasih duitnya ya. J (Colloquial) thanks; Thanks for the money.musala prayer room (for Muslims), a small mosquengapain; Lu lagi ngapain? J (Colloquial) why? why on earth...? what (is someone) doing?

what for? what’s the point? what’s going on?; What are you doing?

nih; Mau ke mana, nih? J (Colloquial) this, at the moment, now; Where are you off to right now?

olahraga sportberpacaran (•pacar) to be going steady, to be dating, to be going out with; pacaran (•pacar); Dodi lagi pacaran sama siapa?

J (Colloquial for berpacaran) to be going steady, to be dating; Who is Dodi going out with now?

senam J (Colloquial for bersenam) to do gymnastics, to do aerobics, to work out

sesudah (•sudah); sesudah pulang after (doing something), after (a certain time), after going homesulit difficult, hard to dotaman; taman nasional a park; a national park

Lesson 36

asal to originate (from)bersama (•sama); bersama dengan together; together withhari libur a day off, a (day off for a) holiday, a one-day holidaykafe a coffeeshopkalau (Anda) bagaimana?; Kalau Pak Iman bagaimana?

what about (you)? what about (her/John etc.); What about Mr. Iman?

pasti; Tidak ada restoran? Pasti ada! definitely, sure to be, bound to (be...), must be (i.e. bound to be); No restaurant? There must be!

Wordlist

sekeluarga the whole familysepi; Pasarnya sepi sekali. quiet, lonely, deserted; The market was deserted.suka sekali; Saya suka sekali bermain tenis.

to really like, to enjoy, to love (doing something); I love playing tennis.

tidak boléh; Tidak boleh ada orang lain yang ikut.

not allowed to, shouldn’t, can’t (i.e. not permitted to); There shouldn’t be any other people coming along.

waktu senggang; Pada waktu senggang, saya ...

free time, spare time, leisure time; In my spare time, I ...

Lesson 37

anggur; buah anggur wine; grapesbulu tangkis badmintoncapai tiredgelas a glass (i.e. a tumbler you drink from), a drinking glasskelab malam; also klab malam & club malam

a night club

nanti dulu just a moment, wait a moment, hang on a secpercaya to believesemua; semua orang tahu all, all of them, everyone, everybody; everyone knows.tadi malam last nightternyata (•nyata); ternyata dia bukan teman yang baik

so ... after all, it turns out that ... after all (expressing mild surprise that something is contrary to expectations); So he wasn’t a true friend after all.

wiski whisky

Lesson 38

bésok; besok pagi tomorrow; tomorrow morninghari ini todaykemarin; kemarin siang yesterday; yesterday afternoonhari Minggu; hari Minggu yang lalu Sunday; last Sundayhari Senin; hari Senin malam Monday; Monday nighthari Selasa; hari Selasa yang akan datang

Tuesday; next Tuesday

hari Rabu; hari Rabu pagi Wednesday; Wednesday morninghari Kamis; hari Kamis yang akan datang

Thursday; next Thursday

hari Jumat; hari Jumat yang lalu Friday; last Fridayhari Sabtu; hari Sabtu malam Saturday; Saturday nightmalam Minggu Saturday night (more common than Sabtu malam)kapan? when? (asking about time)minggu; minggu yang lalu week; last weekSampai jumpa! until (we) meet (again); see you!

Wordlist

Lesson 39

agén perjalanan travel agentjadwal schedulemenurut according topenerbangan (•terbang) flighttikét ticket

Lesson 40

kepada; Dia mengirimkan uang kepada suaminya.

to (when you are talking about something that is directed towards an individual or a group of people, not a place); She sent some money to her husband.

majalah a magazinemembaca (•baca) to readmembersihkan (•bersih) to clean somethingmencuci (•cuci) to wash (something with water)mendengarkan (•dengar) to listen to something; to listenmenonton (•tonton); Saya suka menonton film.

to watch something (especially TV, a sports match, a performance, a movie, a spectacle); I like seeing movies.

menulis (•tulis) to writemenyapu (•sapu) to sweepnovél a novelpiring a plate, the dishessapu broomsedang apa? what are (you) doing?; what is (he/she) doing?surat kabar a newspapersurat a letter (i.e. an item of correspondence)

Lesson 41

bangun; bangun pagi to get up (out of bed); to get up in the morningberita; siaran berita news; a newscast, a news broadcastberpakaian (•pakai) to get dressedbersiap-siap (•siap) to get ready, to make preparations, to prepare (for something)bersisir (•sisir) to combkemudian then, after thatmembeli (•beli) to buymengambil (•ambil) to go and get something, to fetch something, to reach out and

remove, to pick up somethingmenggosok gigi (•gosok) to brush your teethpemandangan (•pandang) a view, a scene, a panorama, (natural) scenerysebelum; sebelum itu before (a certain time/event); before thatsendiri by yourself/oneself (without help from anyone)

Wordlist

Lesson 42

alat a device, a tool, an implementbaju clothes (in general), an upper-body garment, especially shirts,

blouses etc.éléktronik electronichabis J after (informal for sesudah)ingin to wish (to...), to want (to...)jadi (didn’t) happen, (didn’t) work out, so, therefore, thuskami we (excluding the person or persons you are talking to)kerén J stylish, trendykita we (including the person or persons you are talking to)mencoba (•coba) to try to do something, to try something out, to try on (clothes)minggu a weeknonton (•tonton) J (informal for menonton) to see, to watch something (especially

TV, a sports match, a parade etc.)sampai di + (name of place) to arrive in/at (a place), to reach (a destination)untuk (in order) toyang lalu ...ago, last...

Lesson 43

bahasa Belanda Dutch (the language)berkuasa (•kuasa) to be in power, to be the dominant forcebikin J to make (something)duduk-duduk to sit around (in a casual or leisurely way)dulu in former times, a long time ago, used to (i.e. regularly

happened in former times)hukum a law, the law (as a body of regulations or an area of study)ibu kos the landlady (in a boarding house)kalo pagi J in the morning(s)karena becausekenapa why?macam-macam all sorts (of), all kinds (of), various kinds ofmata kuliah a subject (of study at a university), a course, a unit of studymembuat (•buat) to make (something)mengapa (•apa) why?memberikan (•beri) to give somethingngorok J to snorepagi-pagi very early in the morningsulit difficult, hard to dorumah kos a boarding house

Wordlist

tadi pagi this morning (spoken later in the day)tadi siang this afternoon (spoken later in the day)ya; Ini untuk saya, ya? ..., right? ...have you? ...do you? ...does he/she? ...okay?

(seeking confirmation or approval); This is for me, right?undang-undang an act of parliament, law(s) of the land

Lesson 44

ada yang, ada ____ yang some _[noun]_ahli filsafat (also: filsuf) a philosopherberdagang (•dagang) to trade, to earn a living buying & selling, to deal in such-&-such

a commodityberpikir (•pikir) to think, to ponder, to ruminatebiji a seed, a berry, a pip beans (e.g. coffee beans), the stone (in

stone fruit)bola voli volley ball (sometimes simply: voli)gitar a guitaristiméwa special, exceptional, out of the ordinaryjuta millionkalah to lose (a contest/fight etc.), to be defeatedkurang don’t/doesn’t really..., isn’t/aren’t really...lagu a song, a tune, a piece of musicmemperbaiki (•baik) to repair something, to fix something brokenmenang to winmenjadi (•jadi) to become, to bemenjual (•jual) to sell somethingmenyanyi (•nyanyi) to singmenyanyikan (•nyanyi) to sing (a certain song)pandai to be good at (doing something), clever, intelligent, smartpernah once, ever, at some time in the pastpintar clever, intelligent, smartsama sekali absolutely, at all, completely, totally (in negative expressions)tidak begitu... not very..., not especially, not particularly...yang lain the other oneyang + [adjective] the _[adjective]_ one

Lesson 45

memakai (•pakai) to use something, to wear somethingmemelihara (•pelihara) to keep (animals), to take care ofmengajar (•ajar) to teach (someone / students / pupils / a subject), to do

teachingmenolong (•tolong) to help someone (especially someone in difficulty)menunggu (•tunggu) to wait, to wait for (someone / something), to await

Wordlist

minta tolong; Maaf, boleh saya minta tolong?

to ask for assistance/help; Excuse me, could you help me?

sejarah historyselalu alwaysselama; selama tiga minggu for (a certain period of time); for three weekssendirian (•sendiri) alone, on your own (i.e. without a companion)sendiri; Mereka sendiri yang memperbaikinya.

self, -selves (myself, yourself etc. when you want to emphasise who did something); They themselves repaired it.

sudah cukup; Saya kira sudah cukup. that’s enough, that will do; I think that will do for the momenttidak pernah never (the opposite of “always”)waktu; pada waktu itu time; at that time

Lesson 46

akhirnya finally, in the end, eventually, lastlyberapa lama; Berapa lama film ini? how long; How long is this film?detektif private detectivedi antaranya including, among themjam; tiga setengah jam hour / hours; three and a half hourskaviar caviarlobi the lobby (of a hotel)masakan (•masak); masakan Perancis cooking, cuisine, cooked food; French cuisinemawar a rose (also bunga mawar)membayar (•bayar) to paymemilih (•pilih) to choosemencium (•cium) to kiss someone, to smell/sniff somethingméwah luxuriousoléh; dilakukan oleh by (i.e. done/made/written by); done bypipi cheekssambil whilesampanye champagnesenang happy, enjoying yourself, to like something, to like doing

somethingseorang; seorang laki-laki a, one (when you are counting people and there is just one

person to be counted); a man / one manwaktu; also pada waktu; waktu saya sampai di rumah

when, at the time when (referring to a certain time in the past when something happened); when I arrived home

wanita a woman, a lady

Lesson 47

Allah GodAllahu akbar God is greatAl-Quran The Koran (the holy book of Islam)

Wordlist

ayat a verse, a stanza (from a poem or from holy scripture); e.g. ayat-ayat Al-quran

batik batikbarang a thing, goodsberagama (•agama); beragama Islam, beragama Kristen

to be a follower of such-and-such a religion; a Muslim, a (Protestant) Christian

berbuka puasa; also simply berbuka or buka

to break your fast, to have a meal in the evening after a day of fasting

berkumpul (•kumpul) to assemble, to gatherberpuasa (•puasa) to fast, to abstain from food & drinkbersalaman (•salam) to greet each other (usually by shaking hands)bersyukur (•syukur) to thank Godbésoknya the next daybulan puasa the fasting monthdi mana-mana everywheredoa a prayer (especially a personal, meditative prayer)gelap darkhari raya; Hari Raya Idul Adha a feast day, a big religious holiday; the Festival of Sacrificehaus thirstyIdul Fitri the festival of Ied, the (usually two) days of celebrations at the

end of the Muslim fasting monthkali times, a timeketupat lumps of rice boiled in packets made from woven leaves (a

special food eaten at Idul Fitri)lahir dan batin outwardly and inwardlylantai the floor (that you are standing on), a storey of a buildinglapar hungryLebaran (the Javanese term for) the period of celebrations at the end of

the Muslim fasting monthlibur to be shut/closed (for a holiday etc.), to have time off (from

work/school etc.)membawa (•bawa) to bringmemimpin (•pimpin) to leadmengucapkan (•ucap) to say something, to utter somethingminta maaf to ask for forgivenessmohon maaf to ask for forgivenessmudik to make a visit back to your home village in the countryside, to

go upstreamnabi; Nabi Isa a religious prophet; the Prophet Jesusnaik haji to make the pilgrimage to Meccaoléh-oléh a gift/present brought back for family or a friend after a trip

somewhereperabot furniture

Wordlist

puasa fasting, the Islamic Fastréndang a stew of beef chunks cooked until dry in spices and coconut

milksaat a moment; a point in time; a short time; while; duringsahur to eat a pre-dawn meal during the fasting month, to eat an early

breakfast during the fasting monthsangat very, extremelysekitar approximately, around, aboutsekolah menengah high school, secondary schoolsetiap each, everytakbiran to chant Allahu Akbar (God is Great) in chorus over and overtempat kerja work placeulama a very learned and pious Muslim

Keys to the Exercises

Keys to the Exercises for Module 3

Lesson 32Latihan 2: 1e; 2g; 3c; 4h; 5d; 6j; 7a; 8b; 9f; 10iLatihan 3: 1i; 2a; 3f; 4c; 5g; 6h; 7d; 8e; 9bLatihan 4: from left to right and top to bottom: 1e; 2c; 3h; 4f; 5b; 6g; 7d; 8aLatihan 5: 1 Alastair McAlastair berkunjung ke kota Glasgow. 2 Jam berapa saya dapat keluar untuk berjalan-jalan?

3 Anda boleh sarapan dari jam tujuh sampai jam sebelas siang.Latihan 7: Mendatar: 4 pegawai; 6 berapa; 7 sore; 8 kota; 10 minum; 13 lewat; 14 keluar; 15 sampai. Menurun: 1

melihat; 2 harus; 3 kurang; 5 siang; 6 bertanya; 9 boleh; 10 makan; 11 malam; 12 pagi.

Lesson 33Latihan 2: 1c; 2d; 3bc; 4a; 5g; 6h; 7f; 8e.Latihan 3: 1d; 2 false; 3 true; 4c; 5a; 6d; 7 saya lebih suka ayam; 8 false; 9 false.Latihan 7: 1. Jam berapa Anda ke bioskop? 2 Saya ke bioskop jam lima kurang seperempat. 3 Jam berapa pesawat

terbang sampai? 4 Kira-kira jam setengah empat lewat lima.Latihan 8: 1d; 2h; 3i; 4b; 5c; 6e; 7a; 8g; 9f.Latihan 9: Mendatar: 1. teman; 3. makan; 6. berbelanja; 7. kembali; 9. gimana; 11. harus; 13. bioskop; 16. minum;

17. lapangan; 18. tidur; 19. bermain; 20. sekeliling. Menurun: 2. nggak; 4. kuliah; 5. berlari; 6. bertemu; 8. mungkin; 10. tempat; 12. sampai; 14. sekarang; 15. ikut; 16. mandi

Lesson 34Latihan 2: 1 Pada; bermain tenis; 2 bermain; 3 bertemu; 4 belajar; malam hari; 5 berjalan-jalan; 6 berkunjung; 7

berangkat; pada sore hari; 8 salah; 9 berbelanja.Latihan 3: 1 benar; 2 salah; 3 benar; 4 benar; 5 salah; 6 salah.Latihan 4: 1f; 2e; 3b; 4a; 5c; 6d.Latihan 5: 1 Biasanya saya pergi ke kampus pada pagi hari. 2 Pada malam hari kadang-kadang saya belajar di

perpustakaan. 3 Pada sore hari saya suka duduk di ruang tamu dan minum kopi. 4 Pada sore hari saya akan belajar dengan teman saya. 5 Adik saya tidak suka bermain tenis.

Latihan 6: 1a; 2a; 3b; 4b; 5a; 6b; 7b; 8b; 9aLatihan 7: Mendatar: 3. angkot; 5. bertemu; 7. belajar; 8. pulang; 10. pagi; 11. ayah; 13. ruang; 14. lapangan; 15.

setengah. Menurun: 1. perpustakaan; 2. murah; 4. kuliah; 5. berbelanja; 6. rumah; 9. pacar; 12. dengan.

Lesson 35Latihan 2: 1f; 2c; 3g; 4d; 5e; 6b; 7a; 8h.Latihan 3: 1f; 2g; 3b; 4a; 5d; 6h; 7c; 8e.Latihan 4: 1 Pada sore hari biasanya ada acara apa? 2 Biasanya ada kegiatan apa pada pagi hari? 3 Sesudah kuliah

bahasa Inggris biasanya Anda pergi ke mana? 4 Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan sesudah pulang dari kantor? 5 Apa yang biasanya Anda lakukan jam delapan pagi?

Latihan 5: 1b; 2a; 3c; 4b; 5aLatihan 6: gimana; nih; ngapain; cuma; emangnya; nggak; malem; ama; makasih; kalian; main; ajaLatihan 7: 1i; 2e; 3j; 4h; 5a; 6c; 7f; 8d; 9g; 10k; 11bLatihan 8: kegiatan; olahraga; senam; kolam renang; lari; sesudah; apartemen; pacaran; melakukan; badminton;

dilakukan; taman; acara; beristirahatLatihan 9: Mendatar: 2 sedang; 3 berbelanja; 4 musala; 5 berkunjung; 8 lakukan; 9 bersembahyang; 11 bekerja; 12

masih; 13 sulit; 14 masak; 15 pulang. Menurun: 1 bermain; 3 beristirahat; 6 kuliah; 7 berenang; 8 lapangan; 9 bersenam; 10 tidur; 11 bertemu


Lesson 36Latihan 2: 1d; 2e; 3c; 4b; 5a.Latihan 3: 1e; 2b; 3a; 4f; 5d; 6c; g.Latihan 4: 1e; 2g; 3c; 4a; 5b; 6d; 7j; 8f; 9h; 10i.Latihan 5: 1k; 2j; 3e; 4a; 5f; 6b; 7i; 8h; 9c; 10d; 11g.Latihan 6: 1 benar; 2 salah; 3 benar; 4 salah; 5 benar; 6 benar.Latihan 7: beristirahat; kolam renang; olahraga; saya lebih suka masak di rumah; bekerja di kebun/berkebun;

berjalan-jalan; saya sudah tua; boleh saya ikut; katanya/kata Ida; siapa tahu.Latihan 9: 1 Apakah Anda suka berolahraga pada waktu senggang? 2 Kalau tidak bekerja, Anda suka berjalan-jalan

ke mana? 3 Saya suka sekali berbelanja pada waktu senggang. 4 Pacar saya suka sekali bekerja di kebun pada waktu senggang. 5 Apa yang Anda lakukan pada hari libur? 6 Tadi pagi saya ke Toko Fajar bersama dengan teman saya Astuti. 7 Harganya cukup mahal, kira-kira Rp.50.000 untuk kopi dan kue.

Lesson 37Latihan 2: 1f; 2e; 3g; 4c; 5a; 6d; 7bLatihan 4: 1c 2c 3b 4c 5bLatihan 5: 1d; 2f; 3e; 4c; 5b; 6a.Latihan 6: 1 Jam berapa Anda lari pagi? 2 Jam berapa teman Anda akan pergi ke klab malam? 3 Pacar Anda mau

berenang di kolam renang jam berapa? 4 Suami Anda mau berkunjung ke Pusat Mahasiswa jam berapa? 5 Jam berapa Anda mau bersembahyang di musala?

Latihan 7: Mendatar:1. bersembahyang; 3. kira-kira; 4. berenang; 7. ternyata; 8. susu; 10. pesta; 12. percaya; 14. warung; 17. acara; 18. kamu; 19.atau; 20.pusat. Menurun: 1.beristirahat; 2.berkunjung; 5.bertemu; 6.pulang; 9.hanya; 11.semua; 13.capai; 15.gelas; 16.pasti

Lesson 38Latihan 2: 1 mau; 2 boleh; 3 bisa; 4 masih; 5 sudah.Latihan 3: ke mana; Jam berapa?; Sekarang; jauh; jam; besok; malam ini; nantiLatihan 4: 1 Tidak ke mana-mana; 2a; 3c; 4a; 5d; 6 Sampai jumpaLatihan 5: hari Senin;hari Selasa;hari Rabu;hari Kamis;hari Jumat;hari Sabtu;hari MingguLatihan 6: 1c; 2e; 3d 4g; 5a; 6b; 7h; 8f.Latihan 7: 1d; 2b; 3c; 4b; 5bLatihan 8: 1a; 2a; 3b; 4a; 5a; 6aLatihan 9: 1h; 2l; 3a; 4g; 5c; 6j; 7b/k; 8i; 9e; 10f; 11d; 12b/k.Latihan 10: 1 Hari Senin tanggal tujuh Mei. 2 Hari Jumat tanggal delapan belas Juni. 3 Kalau hari ini hari Senin; besok

hari apa? 4 Kalau besok hari Rabu; hari apa hari ini? (Note that this sentence could also have been phrased “Kalau besok hari Rabu; hari ini hari apa?”) 5 Apakah Anda mau berbelanja dengan saya nanti malam jam tujuh?

Latihan 11: Mendatar: 1. bertemu; 3. berenang; 4. belajar; 5. kamis; 6. senin; 7. bekerja; 9. rabu; 10. jumat; 13. sabtu; 14. selasa; 15. bersembahyang; 16. bermain. Menurun: 1. berbelanja; 2. kemarin; 4. besok; 7. berbicara; 8. lusa; 11. minggu; 12. tanggal.

Lesson 39Latihan 2: 1c; 2b; 3 kira-kira; 4 Rp. 500.000; 5a; 6 lebih murah; 7 yang paling murah; 8d; 9c; 10c.Latihan 4: 1d; 2b; 3i; 4e; 5h; 6f; 7g; 8c; 9a.Latihan 5: 1f; 2g; 3a; 4c; 5e; 6d; 7b.Latihan 6: 1a; 2 “180.000”; 3 “52.000”; 4 “4.800”; 5 “1.300”; 6 “15.700”; “7 469”.Latihan 7: 1b; 2 jam tujuh lewat lima; 3 jam sembilan kurang dua puluh; 4 jam setengah sebelas kurang sepuluh; 5

jam satu kurang seperempat; 6 jam dua kurang dua puluhLatihan 8: 1 Ada yang lebih murah? 2 Yang paling murah Mandala, tetapi Sabtu sudah penuh. 3 Berapa lama

penerbangan ke Yogyakarta? 4 Hari Sabtu penerbangan ke Palembang sudah penuh. 5 Boleh saya mintaharga tiket ke Denpasar?

Latihan 9: Mendatar: 2.boleh; 3.saja; 5.jadwal; 6.jam; 8.bagaimana; 10.menurut; 12.harga; 15.penerbangan; 16.murah. Menurun: 1.kapan; 2.berapa; 3.sore; 4.lama; 7.tiket; 8.berangkat; 9.penuh; 11.tetapi; 13.bantu; 14.juga

Lesson 40Latihan 2: membaca-to read; membersihkan-to clean sth; mendengarkan-to listen to sth; menulis-to write; mencuci-


to wash sth; menonton-to watch sth; majalah-magazine; surat kabar-a newspaper; kepada-to, towards; surat-a letter; piring-plate, dish; sedang apa?-what are (you) doing?

Latihan 3: 1e (to attend a school); 2d (to pass away); 3c (a drink; beverage); 4f (all kind of fruits); 5b (a question); 6a (maid; servant; assistant)

Latihan 4: 1d; 2e; 3f; 4b; 5c; 6a.Latihan 5: 1a; 2b; 3f; 4e; 5d; 6c.Latihan 6: 1e; 2i; 3c; 4g; 5j; 6a; 7d; 8f; 9b; 10i.Latihan 7: 1 Ibu Suratminingsih (sedang) mencuci piring. 2 Pak Fernandes (sedang) membaca surat kabar. 3

Keluarga Latumahina (sedang) menonton televisi. 4 Gerson (sedang) menulis surat. 5 Bambang (sedang) membaca buku. 6 Hendro (sedang) menyapu halaman/membersihkan halaman. 7 Keluarga Sucipto (sedang) mendengarkan radio. 8 Ibu Nia dan Ros (sedang) mencuci pakaian. 9 Orang-orang ini (sedang) menonton film.

Latihan 8: 1b; 2b; 3a; 4c; 5d; 6a.Latihan 9: 1 menulis; 2 memasak; 3 mencuci; 4 menonton; 5 membaca; 6 membantu; 7 menyapu; 8 mendengar.Latihan 10: Mendatar: 1 bercakap-cakap; 3 bertanya; 5 bersekolah; 7 berenang; 8 berwarna; 9 bermain; 11

bersenam; 12 berbicara; 13 bersembahyang; 14 berdiri; 15 berasal; 16 berkunjung. Menurun: 1 bertemu; 2 berbelanja; 3 bekerja; 4 berumur; 6 berjalan-jalan; 7 beristirahat; 10 berlari.

Latihan 11: Mendatar: 1 membantu; 5 menulis; 6 mencuci; 8 memanggil; 9 mendengarkan;10 mempunyai. Menurun: 2 membersihkan; 3 membuka; 4 melihat; 7 membaca; 8 menonton.

Lesson 41Latihan 2: 17.00 d; 11.00a; 13.30b; 22.30c; 19.15h; 05.25f; 16.55e; 00.10g.Latihan 3: 1e; 2g; 3f; 4d; 5i; 6b; 7a; 8c; 9h.Latihan 4: 1e; 2f; 3h; 4a; 5b; 6g; 7d; 8c; 9i.Latihan 5: Sebelum berangkat ke kampus Anda harus bersiap-siap dulu. 2 Ratna bersisir, tetapi sebelum itu dia

menggosok gigi. 3 Saya akan berbelanja di mal, tetapi sebelum itu saya harus mengambil uang.Latihan 6: pagi; saya; bangun; jam; bangun; mendengarkan; radio; kadang; televisi; duduk; kebun; lalu; pagi; roti;

buahan; minum; manis; makan; membersihkan; mencuci; piring; pergi; kampus; surat kabar; kadang; majalah; naik; kampus; membaca; majalah; duduk; orang; pemandangan; perpustakaan; tenang; belajar; hari; kira; mengambil; bank; makanan; makan; teman-teman; makan; sendiri

Latihan 7: 1b; 2a; 3c; 4b; 5b; 6aLatihan 8: 1c; 2a; 3b; 4b; 5b; 6a&c; 7a; 8b; 9c; 10dLatihan 9: Mendatar: 1 sebelum; 5 pemandangan; 6 mencari; 10 kemudian; 11 menggosok; 12 sesudah; 13

berpakaian. Menurun: 2 mengambil; 3 berita; 4 bangun; 7 bersisir; 8 membeli; 9 sendiri

Lesson 42Latihan 2: 1e; 2d; 3f; 4a; 4c; 6b.Latihan 3: 1b; 2f; 3c; 4g; 5a; 6d; 7e.Latihan 4: 1a; 2b; 3b; 4b; 5a.Latihan 5: 1 Jam berapa Anda berangkat dari rumah? 2 Apakah Anda membersihkan rumah sebelum berangkat? 3

Anda pergi ke kota naik apa? 4 Di toko alat-alat elektronik Anda mencari apa? 5 Jam berapa Anda sampai di rumah pada sore hari?

Latihan 6: 1i; 2h; 3j; 4l; 5k; 6d; 7b; 8a; 9g; 10c; 11e; 12f.Latihan 7: 1c; 2c; 3a; 4b; 5b; 6b; 7a; 8c; 9a;10bLatihan 9: 1i; 2c; 3d; 4h; 5d; 6a; 7b; 8f.Latihan 11: 1 sesudah; 2 menonton; 3 baiklah; 4 tidak; 5 saya; 6 bertemu; 7 dengan 8 bermain; 9 begitu; 10 sesudah;

11 Anda; 12 berbelanja; 13 bertemu; 14 bagaimana; 15 mencari.Latihan 12: 1f; 2b; 3i; 4g; 5e; 6a; 7j; 8c; 9d; 10h.Latihan 13: 1k; 2n; 3e; 4f; 5h; 6c; 7g; 8d; 9o; 10a; 11b; 12l; 13m; 14j; 15iLatihan 14: Mendatar 3 mencoba; 4 harga; 6 belanja; 7 jadi; 8 kita; 9 ingin; 12 menonton; 13 mencari; 14 untuk; 16

elektronik; 18 beres; 19 nonton; 20 cari. Menurun: 1 pakaian; 2 habis; 3 melihat; 5 alat; 9 minggu; 10 berangkat; 15 keren; 17 kami; 18 baju.

Lesson 43Latihan 2: 1g; 2e; 3h; 4f; 5c; 6b; 7d; 8aLatihan 3: 1 Mengapa Anda bangun jam setengah lima pagi? 2 Mengapa Anda tidak suka berjalan-jalan pada pagi

hari? 3 Mengapa Gatot tidak mau menonton film dengan kita? 4 Mengapa biasanya Anda mendengarkan radio pada pagi hari? 5 Mengapa Anda tidak suka tinggal di New York?

Latihan 4: A: Besok pagi saya akan bangun jam enam. B: Kenapa? A: Karena ada kuliah jam delapan. B: Jam


delapan? Pagi sekali! Mengapa Anda harus kuliah jam delapan pagi? A: Karena Ibu dosen lebih suka memberikan kuliah pagi-pagi.

Latihan 5: 1.Saya mau tinggal di sini dulu., 2.Dulu saya tinggal di sini., 3.Duduk dulu., 4.Saya mau mandi dulu., 5.Dulu ada bioskop di sini.

Latihan 6: 1a; 2a; 3b; 4b; 5a; 6a; 7b; 8a; 9a; 10bLatihan 7: 1b; 2a; 3c; 4g; 5i; 6e; 7h; 8f; 9j; 10d.1b; 2a; 3c; 4g; 5i; 6e; 7h; 8f; 9j; 10d.Latihan 8: 1l; 2i; 3o; 4h; 5f; 6j; 7e; 8a; 9d; 10b; 11g; 12n;13k; 14mLatihan 11: 1g; 2e; 3c; 4b; 5a; 6h; 7f; 8dLatihan 12: Mendatar: 2 dulu; 6 berkuasa; 7 hukum; 8 bikin; 12 tua; 13 pagi; 14 mengapa; 15 memberikan. Menurun:

1 karena; 2 dosen; 3 sulit; 4 terkenal; 5 membuat; 6 berkunjung; 9 kuliah; 10 mencari; 11 bangun.

Lesson 44Latihan 2: 1g; 2d; 3c; 4b; 5a; 6f; 7eLatihan 3: 1e; 2a; 3j; 4g; 5f; 6i; 7d; 8c; 9b; 10hLatihan 4: 1e; 2a; 3d; 4b; 5c.Latihan 5: 1. Saya kira laki-laki itu tidak pintar. 2 Dulu saya pandai main piano, tetapi sekarang tidak lagi. 3 Saya

sama sekali tidak pandai memasak.Latihan 6: 1d; 2c; 3a; 4c; 5a; 6c; 7b; 8d; 9d; 10d; 11bLatihan 8: Mendatar: 4 menyanyikan; 6 pandai; 10 menjual; 11 istimewa; 12 kurang; 14 gitar; 15 pernah; 16 sayuran;

17 berpikir; 18 juta. Menurun: 1 biji; 2 kalah; 3 berdagang; 4 menjadi; 5 berenang; 7 betul; 8 memperbaiki;9 lagu; 10 menang 13 tertawa

Lesson 45Latihan 2: masuk–to enter; minum–to drink; makan–to eat; minta–to request; bangun–to get up; duduk–to sit; tidur–

to sleep; hidup–to live; datang–to come; pergi–go; leave; ikut–follow; join; mandi–to bathe; kembali–to return; tahu–to know.

Latihan 3: berbelanja–go shopping; berumur–to be aged; bermain–to play; belajar–to learn; bekerja–to work; berangkat–to depart; berasal–to originate; berdiri–to stand; beristirahat–to rest; bercakap-cakap–to chat; berbicara–to talk; berpikir–to think.

Latihan 4: 1c; 2a; 3b; 4f; 5e; 6d.Latihan 5: 1e; 2d; 3c; 4a; 5b; 6f.Latihan 6: 1i; 2a; 3b; 4d; 5f; 6h;7c; 8j; 9g; 10e.Latihan 7: 1 menolong; 2 mengajar; 3 memelihara; 4 menunggu; 5 memakai; 6 mendengar; 7 membaca; 8 mencuci;

9 membuka; 10 membuat; 11 menyapu; 12 membersihkan; 13 memasak; 14 membeli.Latihan 8: 1 Ibu Mariana yang membuat kue itu. 2. Saya yang biasanya mencuci piring, tetapi kakak saya yang

mencuci pakaian. 3. Bapak Tubagus selalu menyanyi pada waktu mandi. 4. Dia tidak pernah menolong orang yang minta tolong. 5. Terima kasih, Bu Lia, saya kira sudah cukup. 6. Siapa perempuan yang selalumemakai baju merah itu?

Latihan 10: 1b; 2b; 3b; 4b; 5a; 6dLatihan 11: Mendatar: 1 mencuci; 3 bertemu; 4 semua; 6 pembantu; 8 anjing; 9 kemarin; 10 selalu; 11 sejarah; 14

menunggu; 15 memelihara; 16 surat; 17 waktu; 18 tidur. Menurun:1 membuat; 2 selama; 5 menolong; 7 mengajar; 12 sendirian; 13 berangkat; 14 memakai.

Lesson 46Latihan 2: 1d; 2e; 3a; 4c; 5b.Latihan 3: 1. Berapa lama mereka tinggal di Sulawesi? 2. Berapa lama Anda bekerja di kantor tadi? 3. Berapa lama

mereka berjalan-jalan di pusat kota? 4.Apa yang dilakukan oleh Bapak Yusuf? 5. Apa yang mereka lakukan?

Latihan 4: 1 Apa yang dilakukan Pak Alni sesudah sarapan? 2 Apa yang dilakukan perempuan itu pada malam hari? 3 Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah berbelanja? OR Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) mereka sesudah berbelanja? 4 Apa yang dia lakukan tadi malam? OR Apa yang dilakukannya tadi malam? 5 Apa yang dia lakukan sebelum mandi? OR Apa yang dilakukannya sebelum mandi? 6 Apa yang dilakukan Bu Alni sesudah menonton film? 7 Apa yang mereka lakukan sesudah bertemu di rumah makan? OR Apa yang dilakukan (oleh) mereka sesudah bertemu di rumah makan? 8 Apa yang dilakukan Pak Alni sesudah bangun? 9 Apa yang dilakukan suaminya sebelum membeli bunga? 10 Apa yang dilakukan istrinya pada jam lima sore?

Latihan 5: 1g; 2h;3d; 4b; 5e; 6c; 7a; 8f.Latihan 6: a6; b1; c4; d10; e5; f3; g8; h11; i2; j12; k7; l13; m14; n15; o9.Latihan 7: lobi—lobby; oleh—by; berapa lama—how long; jam—hour; masakan—cooked food; mawar—rose;


seorang—a person; memilih—to choose; mewah—luxurious; akhirnya—finally; telur—egg; membayar—topay; di antaranya—including; senang—happy, to enjoy; waktu—time, when; mencium—to kiss; pipi—cheeks; sambil—while.

Latihan 9: Mendatar: 1 beberapa; 3 seorang; 5 akhirnya; 6 mencium; 8 memilih;11 sambil; 16 senang; 17 mencoba; 18 membayar; 19 pipi. Menurun: 1 berdiri; 2 waktu; 4 detektif; 7 menunggu; 8 mawar; 9 masakan; 10 oleh; 12 sarapan; 13 mewah; 14 lobi; 15 jam.

Lesson 47Latihan 2: 1d; 2e; 3m; 4b; 5a; 6h; 7g; 8k; 9i; 10c; 11f; 12j; 13q; 14l; 15p; 16n; 17o.Latihan 3: berasal; berpuasa; sehari; untuk; bersembahyang; tempat; perabot; kira-kira; lapar; capai; gelap; manis;

mudik; saat; ramai; bermacam-macam; memperbaiki; membersihkan; sekali; berkumpul; memimpin; Allah; maaf; tertawa; Mohon; bermain

Latihan 4: 1c; 2b; 3 Ibu Hamidah; 4B; 5 kereta api; oleh-oleh; 6 sebelas jam; 7c; 8c; 9c. 10 Mohon maaf lahir dan batin.

Latihan 5: 1S; 2S; 3S; 4B; 5B; 6B; 7B; 8S; 9S; 10SLatihan 6: 1.Keluarga Bapak Ridwan beragama Islam. 2.Bulan puasa penting sekali untuk semua orang Islam.

3.Kira-kira jam enam pagi Bapak Ridwan dan Ibu Hamidah berangkat ke tempat kerja. 4.Tetapi mereka tidak boleh makan dan minum pada siang hari. 5.Mereka semua lapar dan haus.

Latihan 7: 1d; 2c; 3e; 4b; 5g; 6h; 7f; 8j; 9a; 10i.Latihan 8: 1a; 2j; 3f; 4i; 5h; 6d; 7e; 8g; 9b; 10c.Latihan 9: Mendatar: 4 tertawa; 6 nabi; 8 lebaran; 9 mudik; 15 beragama; 16 haji; 17 penting; 18 berpuasa.

Menurun: 1 membeli; 2 menunggu; 3 memperbaiki; 5 Allah; 7 mencoba; 10 doa; 11 puasa; 12 setiap; 13 sahur; 14 kue.

Documents

The Indonesian Way